Sunteți pe pagina 1din 330

CN-235 MAINTENANCE MANUAL

CHAPTER 61
LIST OF EFFECTIVE PAGES

CHAPTER
SUBJECT
List of
Effective
Page

Table of
Contents

61-00-00
61-10-00
CONFIG.1

PAGE

CHAPTER
SUBJECT

DATE

1
2
3
4
5
6

May
May
May
May
May
May

15/15
15/15
15/15
15/15
15/15
15/15

1
2
3
4

May
May
May
May

15/15
15/15
15/15
15/15

1
2

Jul. 31/93
Jul. 31/93

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8

Jul.
Jul.
Jul.
Jul.
Jul.
Jul.
Jul.
Jul.

31/06
31/06
31/06
31/06
31/06
31/06
31/06
31/06

May
May
May
May
May
May
May
May
May
May
May
May
May
May

15/15
15/15
15/15
15/15
15/15
15/15
15/15
15/15
15/15
15/15
15/15
15/15
15/15
15/15

61-10-10
61-10-00

501
502
503
504
505
506
507
508
509
510
511
512
513
514

Effectivity: OM01

PAGE

DATE

515
516
517
518
519
520
521
522
523
524
525
526
601
602
603
604
605
606
607
608
609
610
701
702
703
704

May
May
May
May
May
May
May
May
May
May
May
May
May
May
May
May
May
May
May
May
May
May
Mar.
Mar.
Mar.
Mar.

15/15
15/15
15/15
15/15
15/15
15/15
15/15
15/15
15/15
15/15
15/15
15/15
15/15
15/15
15/15
15/15
15/15
15/15
15/15
15/15
15/15
15/15
31/00
31/00
31/00
31/00

401
402
403
404
405
406
407
408
409
410
411
412
413
414
415

May
May
May
May
May
May
May
May
May
May
May
May
May
May
May

15/13
15/13
15/13
15/13
15/13
15/13
15/13
15/13
15/13
15/13
15/13
15/13
15/13
15/13
15/13

61 - LEP

May

Pag. 1
15/15

CN-235 MAINTENANCE MANUAL


CHAPTER
SUBJECT

PAGE
416

61-20-00
CONFIG.1

61-20-00

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
101
102

Effectivity: OM01

CHAPTER
SUBJECT

DATE
May

15/13

Jun.
Jun.
Jun.
Jun.
Jun.
Jun.
Jun.
Jun.
Jun.
Jun.
Jun.
Jun.
Jun.
Jun.
Jun.
Jun.
Jun.
Jun.
Jun.
Jun.
Jun.
Jun.
Jun.
Jun.
Jun.
Jun.
Jun.
Jun.
Jun.
Jun.
Jun.
Jun.
Jun.
Jun.
Jun.
Jun.
Jun.
Jun.
Jun.
Jun.
Jun.
Jun.

30/02
30/02
30/02
30/02
30/02
30/02
30/02
30/02
30/02
30/02
30/02
30/02
30/02
30/02
30/02
30/02
30/02
30/02
30/02
30/02
30/02
30/02
30/02
30/02
30/02
30/02
30/02
30/02
30/02
30/02
30/02
30/02
30/02
30/02
30/02
30/02
30/02
30/02
30/02
30/02
30/02
30/02

Jun. 01/99
Jun. 01/99

61-20-10

61-20-11
CONFIG.2

61-20-12
CONFIG.2

61-20-12
CONFIG.1

61-20-13

PAGE

DATE

103
104
105
106
301
302
303
304
305
306
307
308
309
310
501
502
503
504
505
506

Jun.
Jun.
Jun.
Jun.
May
May
May
May
May
May
May
May
May
May
Nov.
Nov.
Nov.
Nov.
Nov.
Nov.

01/99
01/99
01/99
01/99
15/15
15/15
15/15
15/15
15/15
15/15
15/15
15/15
15/15
15/15
15/13
15/13
15/13
15/13
15/13
15/13

401
402
403
404

Oct.
Oct.
Oct.
Oct.

15/00
15/00
15/00
15/00

401
402
403
404

Jun.
Jun.
Jun.
Jun.

30/02
30/02
30/02
30/02

1
2
3
4
5
6

Jun.
Jun.
Jun.
Jun.
Jun.
Jun.

30/02
30/02
30/02
30/02
30/02
30/02

401
402
403
404

Oct.
Oct.
Oct.
Oct.

15/00
15/00
15/00
15/00

401
402

Mar. 31/00
Mar. 31/00

61 - LEP

May

Pag. 2
15/15

CN-235 MAINTENANCE MANUAL


CHAPTER
SUBJECT

PAGE

CHAPTER
SUBJECT

DATE

403
404

Mar. 31/00
Mar. 31/00

61-20-14

401
402
403
404

Mar.
Mar.
Mar.
Mar.

31/00
31/00
31/00
31/00

61-20-15

401
402
403
404

Mar.
Mar.
Mar.
Mar.

31/00
31/00
31/00
31/00

61-20-16

401
402
403
404
405
406

Jul.
Jul.
Jul.
Jul.
Jul.
Jul.

30/08
30/08
30/08
30/08
30/08
30/08

61-26-00
CONFIG.1

CONFIG.2
61-20-17
CONFIG.1

61-20-18

61-20-19

61-26-00
CONFIG.1

CONFIG.2

401
402
403
404
405
406

Jun.
Jun.
Jun.
Jun.
Jun.
Jun.

30/02
30/02
30/02
30/02
30/02
30/02

401
402
403
404

Mar.
Mar.
Mar.
Mar.

31/00
31/00
31/00
31/00

401
402
403
404

Mar.
Mar.
Mar.
Mar.

31/00
31/00
31/00
31/00

1
2
3
4
5
6

Nov.
Nov.
Nov.
Nov.
Nov.
Nov.

30/97
30/97
30/97
30/97
30/97
30/97

1
2

Mar. 01/99
Mar. 01/99

Effectivity: OM01

61-26-00
CONFIG.1

CONFIG.2

61-26-01
CONFIG.1

PAGE

DATE

3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14

Mar.
Mar.
Mar.
Mar.
Mar.
Mar.
Mar.
Mar.
Mar.
Mar.
Mar.
Mar.

01/99
01/99
01/99
01/99
01/99
01/99
01/99
01/99
01/99
01/99
01/99
01/99

101
102
103
104

Nov.
Nov.
Nov.
Nov.

30/97
30/97
30/97
30/97

101
102
103
104

Mar.
Mar.
Mar.
Mar.

01/99
01/99
01/99
01/99

501
502
503
504

Nov.
Nov.
Nov.
Nov.

15/14
15/14
15/14
15/14

501
502
503
504
505
506
507
508
509
510
511
512

Dec.
Dec.
Dec.
Dec.
Dec.
Dec.
Dec.
Dec.
Dec.
Dec.
Dec.
Dec.

15/10
15/10
15/10
15/10
15/10
15/10
15/10
15/10
15/10
15/10
15/10
15/10

401
402
403
404

Jun.
Jun.
Jun.
Jun.

30/02
30/02
30/02
30/02

61 - LEP

May

Pag. 3
15/15

CN-235 MAINTENANCE MANUAL


CHAPTER
SUBJECT

PAGE

DATE

61-26-02

401
402
403
404

Mar.
Mar.
Mar.
Mar.

61-30-00

1
2

61-31-00
CONFIG.1

CONFIG.1

61-31-00

CHAPTER
SUBJECT

DATE

511
512
513
514
515
516
517
518
519
520

Dec.
Dec.
Dec.
Dec.
Dec.
Dec.
Dec.
Dec.
Dec.
Dec.

15/08
15/08
15/08
15/08
15/08
15/08
15/08
15/08
15/08
15/08

61-31-11

401
402
403
404
405
406

Dec.
Dec.
Dec.
Dec.
Dec.
Dec.

15/08
15/08
15/08
15/08
15/08
15/08

61-31-12

401
402
403
404
405
406

Dec.
Dec.
Dec.
Dec.
Dec.
Dec.

15/08
15/08
15/08
15/08
15/08
15/08

61-31-13

401
402
403
404

Mar.
Mar.
Mar.
Mar.

31/00
31/00
31/00
31/00

61-31-14

401
402
403
404
405
406
601
602
603
604
605
606

Dec.
Dec.
Dec.
Dec.
Dec.
Dec.
Dec.
Dec.
Dec.
Dec.
Dec.
Dec.

15/08
15/08
15/08
15/08
15/08
15/08
15/08
15/08
15/08
15/08
15/08
15/08

1
2
3
4

Jul.
Jul.
Jul.
Jul.

31/06
31/06
31/06
31/06

31/00
31/00
31/00
31/00

Jul. 31/93
Jul. 31/93

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16

Jun.
Jun.
Jun.
Jun.
Jun.
Jun.
Jun.
Jun.
Jun.
Jun.
Jun.
Jun.
Jun.
Jun.
Jun.
Jun.

01/99
01/99
01/99
01/99
01/99
01/99
01/99
01/99
01/99
01/99
01/99
01/99
01/99
01/99
01/99
01/99

101
102
103
104
105
106

Jul.
Jul.
Jul.
Jul.
Jul.
Jul.

01/98
01/98
01/98
01/98
01/98
01/98

301
302
303
304
501
502
503
504
505
506
507
508
509
510

Dec.
Dec.
Dec.
Dec.
Dec.
Dec.
Dec.
Dec.
Dec.
Dec.
Dec.
Dec.
Dec.
Dec.

15/08
15/08
15/08
15/08
15/08
15/08
15/08
15/08
15/08
15/08
15/08
15/08
15/08
15/08

Effectivity: OM01

PAGE

61-40-00
CONFIG.1

61 - LEP

May

Pag. 4
15/15

CN-235 MAINTENANCE MANUAL


CHAPTER
SUBJECT

PAGE
5
6

61-40-00

101
102
601
602
603
604

Effectivity: OM01

CHAPTER
SUBJECT

DATE

PAGE

DATE

Jul. 31/06
Jul. 31/06
Jul.
Jul.
Mar.
Mar.
Mar.
Mar.

31/93
31/93
31/00
31/00
31/00
31/00

61 - LEP

May

Pag. 5
15/15

CN-235 MAINTENANCE MANUAL

INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK

Effectivity: OM01

61 - LEP

May

Pag. 6
15/15

CN-235 MAINTENANCE MANUAL


CHAPTER 61
TABLE OF CONTENTS

SUBJECT

CHAPTER/
SECTION

PROPELLERS

61-00-00

Description/Operation
PROPELLER ASSEMBLY
Description/Operation
PROPELLER ASSEMBLY

PAGE

All
1

61-10-00
CONFIG.1

SERIES 100
1

61-10-00

SERIES 100

Adjustment/Test

501

Inspection/Check

601

Cleaning/Painting

701

PROPELLER ASSEMBLY

61-10-10

Removal/Installation
PROPELLER CONTROLLING
Description/Operation
PROPELLER CONTROLLING

SERIES 100
401

61-20-00
CONFIG.1

SERIES 100
1

61-20-00

SERIES 100

Troubleshooting

101

Servicing

301

Adjustment/Test

501

SYNCHROPHASING CONTROL UNIT, KD3

Effectivity: OM01

EFF.

61-20-10

SERIES 100

61 - TOC

May

Pag. 1
15/15

CN-235 MAINTENANCE MANUAL

SUBJECT

CHAPTER/
SECTION

Removal/Installation
SWITCHER, KC80
Removal/Installation
FEATHER SYST CONTROL UNIT, KC50
Description/Operation
FEATHER SYST CONTROL UNIT, KC50

61-20-11
CONFIG.2

CONFIG.2

61-20-13

Removal/Installation

401
SERIES 100

SERIES 100
401

61-20-15

SERIES 100
401

61-20-16

Removal/Installation

SERIES 100
401

61-20-17

Removal/Installation

CONFIG.1

AUTOFEATHER COMPUTER, KC43

61-20-18

Effectivity: OM01

SERIES 100

61-20-14

Removal/Installation

Removal/Installation

401

Removal/Installation

TIMER, KC15 (KC16)

401

61-20-12

AUXILIARY PUMP, KC41 (KC42)

CONTROL ADAPTER ASSEMBLY

OM01 POST.SB.235-61-04M

61-20-12

CONFIG.1

PRESSURE SWITCH, KC33 (KC34)

EFF.

401

Removal/Installation

OVERSPEED GOVERNOR, KC37 (KC38)

PAGE

SERIES 100
401
SERIES 100
401

61 - TOC

May

Pag. 2
15/15

CN-235 MAINTENANCE MANUAL

SUBJECT

CHAPTER/
SECTION

MAGNETIC SENSOR, KD4 (KD5)

61-20-19

Removal/Installation
FLIGHT IDLE SOLENOID OVERRIDE
CIRCUIT

PAGE

EFF.
SERIES 100

401
61-26-00

Description/Operation

CONFIG.1

OM01 PRE.SB.235-76-06M

Description/Operation

CONFIG.2

OM01 POST.SB.235-76-06M

FLIGHT IDLE SOLENOID OVERRIDE


CIRCUIT

61-26-00

Troubleshooting

CONFIG.1

101

OM01 PRE.SB.235-76-06M

Troubleshooting

CONFIG.2

101

OM01 POST.SB.235-76-06M

FLIGHT IDLE SOLENOID OVERRIDE


CIRCUIT

61-26-00

Adjustment/Test

CONFIG.1

501

OM01 PRE.SB.235-76-06M

Adjustment/Test

CONFIG.2

501

OM01 POST.SB.235-76-06M

REVERSE CONTROL UNIT, KB48

61-26-01

Removal/Installation

CONFIG.1

FILTER UNIT, KB56

Description/Operation

Effectivity: OM01

OM01 POST.SB.235-76-06M
401

61-30-00

Description/Operation
PROPELLER BRAKE SYSTEM

401

61-26-02

Removal/Installation
BRAKING

OM01 POST.SB.235-76-06M

All
1

61-31-00
CONFIG.1

SERIES 100
1

61 - TOC

May

Pag. 3
15/15

CN-235 MAINTENANCE MANUAL


CHAPTER/
SECTION

PAGE

Troubleshooting

CONFIG.1

101

PROPELLER BRAKE SYSTEM

61-31-00

SUBJECT

All

Servicing

301

Adjustment/Test

501

PROPELLER BRAKE CONTROL VALVE

61-31-11

Removal/Installation
QUICK DISCONNECT COUPLINGS

61-31-12

All
401

61-31-13

Removal/Installation
PROPELLER BRAKE HEAD ASSEMBLY

All
401

Removal/Installation
PRESSURE SWITCH KE11, KE12

All
401

61-31-14

All

Removal/Installation

401

Inspection/Check

601

PROPELLER INDICATING
Description/Operation
PROPELLER INDICATING

61-40-00
CONFIG.1

SERIES 100
1

61-40-00

SERIES 100

Troubleshooting

101

Inspection/Check

601

Effectivity: OM01

EFF.

61 - TOC

May

Pag. 4
15/15

CN-235 MAINTENANCE MANUAL


PROPELLERS
DESCRIPTION/OPERATION

1. General
The propellers installed on the aircraft are Hamilton Standard Type
14RF-21, four-bladed, variable pitch, feathering propeller assemblies
(Ref. 61-10-00, P. Block 1).
Pitch and feathering control is done thru a propeller control unit and an
auxiliary feathering pump (Ref. 61-20-00, P. Block 1)installed on the
propeller gearbox (Ref. 71-00-00, P. Block 1).
To let the RH engine be used as an auxiliary power unit during ground
operations, the RH propeller can be prevented from turning thru a
propeller brake unit installed on the fron of the propeller gearbox
(Ref. 61-30-00, P. Block 1).
A phase synchronization system is used to reduce the level of noise and
vibration (Ref. 61-20-00, P. Block 1).

Effectivity: See TOC

61-00-00

Pag. 1
Jul. 31/93

CN-235 MAINTENANCE MANUAL

INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK

Effectivity: See TOC

61-00-00

Pag. 2
Jul. 31/93

CN-235 MAINTENANCE MANUAL


PROPELLER ASSEMBLY
DESCRIPTION/OPERATION

1. General
The propellers are four bladed assemblies, with hydraulically controlled
variable pitch, feathering and reverse capability.
Pitch and feathering controls is done thru a propeller control unit and an
auxiliary oil pump using oil from the propeller gearbox sump
(Ref. 61-20-00, P. Block 1).
2. Component Location (Fig. 1)
ITEM

FIN

(1)

DESIGNATION

ZONE

ACCESS
PANEL

REFERENCE

Propeller LH
Assembly RH

410
420

411
421

61-10-10

3. Description (Fig. 2)
The propeller assembly is made up of a propeller hub (2), four blade
assemblies (20), blade to hub retention mechanism, pitch change actuator
(15), spinner, backing bulkhead (10), oil transfer tube (5) and propeller
to gearbox attachment bolts.
Each blade assembly has a solid aluminum alloy spar with an external
glass-reinforced plastic (GRP) airfoil bonded to the spar. The leading and
trailing edges of the airfoil are filled with low-density, polyurethane
foam. The leading edge of each blade is protected from erosion by a nickel
sheath external (1). De-icing of the blades is done thru selectable dual
cycle heaters with a 10-second ON, 60-second OFF or 20-second ON,
60-second OFF operating mode. Each blade is protected from lightening
strikes by an integral tip strap.
Each blade is installed in a one-piece aluminum alloy hub by hardened
steel bearing races and nylon ball separators (13). The bearing races are
held in position by an outer nylon retainer (21). To prevent loss of
lubrication, each blade root is sealed in the hub by a retaining joint
(12), (22).

Effectivity: See TOC

61-10-00

CONFIG. 1
Pag. 1
Jul. 31/06

CN-235 MAINTENANCE MANUAL


Propellers - Component Location

CM1.61.10.00.0AO.00.01-00

Fig. 1 Propellers - Component Location

Effectivity: See TOC

61-10-00

CONFIG. 1
Pag. 2
Jul. 31/06

CN-235 MAINTENANCE MANUAL


Each blade is statically held in position in its bearing race by a
two-piece, molded plastic retaining ring, which is also the attachment
point for the blade de-icing electrical leads.
A GRP bulkhead (10) is installed on the rear of the hub to give support to
the aluminum spinner, which is fastened by twelve tri-wing screws (11). On
the rear of the bulkhead, slip rings (8) are bonded which transfer
electrical power supply to the blade de-icing heaters.
A magnetic sensor (4) on the rear of the propeller bulkhead (10) is used
to sense the RPM of the propeller for the synchrophaser of the propeller
control system.
After assembly, the propeller is balanced by installing special bolts,
washer and nuts (9) in the propeller bulkhead.
The propeller hub rear face is machined with fourteen holes. Twelve holes
are used for the twelve bolts which fasten the propeller to the gearbox.
Two opposing holes (7) are used to engage with dowels on the gearbox drive
shaft flange. The twelve attachment bolts are held in a bolt torque plate
by means of a locking flange on the inner face of the rear hub section.
To prevent loss of lubrication, seals (6), (19) are installed between the
hub and gearbox drive shaft flange, and between the front face of the hub
(2) and the pitch change cylinder (15).
The pitch change cylinder (15) is fastened to the front face of the hub by
twelve bolts, and holds an actuator piston (16) and integral yoke, a
four-way metering valve assembly (17) and a pitchlock screw (14). An oil
transfer tube (5), installed thru the center of the cylinder, receives
pitch change oil from the gearbox sump via the propeller control and a
gearbox driven main pump.
4. Operation (Fig. 3)
The propeller is driven by the engine thru a propeller speed reduction
gearbox. The propeller and propeller pitch control are installed on a
common centerline and are connected together by the oil transfer tube (5)
. The oil transfer torque tube transfers supply oil from the gearbox
driven oil pump via the propeller control unit to the four-way metering
valve (7) in the propeller pitch change assembly.

Effectivity: See TOC

61-10-00

CONFIG. 1
Pag. 3
Jul. 31/06

CN-235 MAINTENANCE MANUAL


Propellers - General Arrangement

CM1.61.10.00.0BO.00.01-00

Fig. 2 Propellers - General Arrangement

Effectivity: See TOC

61-10-00

CONFIG. 1
Pag. 4
Jul. 31/06

CN-235 MAINTENANCE MANUAL


Pitch change signals from the propeller control unit are supplied via the
oil transfer torque tube (4) to drive the acme pitchlock screw (6) in the
pitch change assembly. Turning the pitchlock screw (6) moves the metering
valve (7) which connects the supply pressure oil to one side of the
actuator piston (1) and the other side of the piston to return. Supply
pressure oil can now act on the piston (1) and move it in the selected
direction. Movement of the piston (1) is transferred to the blades (9)
thru the yoke (2) and blade pins (3). At the same time, the pitchlock
screw nut (5) is moved to the closed (null) position and the blades are
hydraulically locked at the signalled pitch angle.
A.

Increasing Propeller Pitch


Turning the pitchlock screw (6) counterclockwise (viewed from the
rear) advances the pitchlock screw forward in the yoke (2). This
movement operates the metering valve (7) which opens to direct supply
pressure oil to the increase pitch side of the actuator piston and
connects the decrease pitch side of the piston to return. The supply
pressure oil moves the piston (1), yoke (2) and pitchlock screw nut
(5) rearward to push the yoke trunnion arms and blade pin (3) turning
the blades to increase the pitch angle.
The metering valve (7) is kept open by continued propeller control
unit output to the pitchlock screw (4) until the required blade angle
is reached. When the control unit output is removed, continued
rearward movement of the yoke (2) closes the metering valve (7) to
complete the pitch change actuation.

B.

Decreasing Propeller Pitch


To move the blades towards decrease pitch, the pitchlock screw (6) is
turned clockwise. This movement opens the metering valve (7) to
direct supply pressure oil to the decrease pitch side of the actuator
piston (1) and connects the increase pitch side of the piston to
return. The supply pressure oil moves the piston (1), yoke (2) and
pitchscrew nut (5) forward pulling the yoke trunnion arms and
bladepin (3) turning the blades to decrease the pitch angle.
When the propeller control unit senses that the blades are at the
required angle, control unit output is removed and the metering valve
(7) is closed by the null action of the final movement of the yoke
(2) to complete the pitch change actuation.

Effectivity: See TOC

61-10-00

CONFIG. 1
Pag. 5
Jul. 31/06

CN-235 MAINTENANCE MANUAL


Variable Pitch Propeller Operation - Schematic

CM1.61.10.00.0CO.00.01-00

Fig. 3 Variable Pitch Propeller Operation - Schematic

Effectivity: See TOC

61-10-00

CONFIG. 1
Pag. 6
Jul. 31/06

CN-235 MAINTENANCE MANUAL


C.

Pitchlock Gap
During pitch changes, the pitchlock screw (6) is moved to maintain a
pitchlock gap of approximately 1 of blade angle 0,030 in (0,76mm).
This pitchlock gap makes certain that blade pitch will not decrease
if supply pressure oil fails. The pitchlock screw (6) acts as a low
pitch stop since the blades cannot decrease pitch more than 1 from
the selected pitch angle.
Normal aerodynamic and centrifugal forces acting on the propeller try
to turn the blades to low pitch. If supply pressure oil fails when
the blades are at a positive pitch angle, the blades will try to move
the yoke (2), pitchlock screw (6) and metering valve (7) forward in
the pitch charge cylinder (8). Significant movement is prevented by
the pitchlock feature. The yoke (2) can only move thru the 1 blade
angle of the pitchlock gap.
Pitchlock occurs when the pitchlock screw (6) is touching the body of
the pitch change metering valve.
Actuation of the yoke (2) and blades (9) will be possible when supply
oil pressure is available again.

D.

Blade De-icing System (Fig. 2)


The de-icing system uses face-type slip rings (8) which are bonded to
the rear of the propeller bulkhead (10).
The slip rings (8) transfer electrical power from the fixed supply to
the turning propeller blade heaters integrally molded into the blade
leading edges.

5. Interfaces
The propeller assemblies interface with the following systems or
sub-systems:
- Propeller De-icing System (Ref. 30-61-00, P. Block 1)
- Propeller Controlling (Ref. 61-20-00, P. Block 1).

Effectivity: See TOC

61-10-00

CONFIG. 1
Pag. 7
Jul. 31/06

CN-235 MAINTENANCE MANUAL

INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK

Effectivity: See TOC

61-10-00

CONFIG. 1
Pag. 8
Jul. 31/06

CN-235 MAINTENANCE MANUAL


PROPELLER ASSEMBLY
ADJUSTMENT/TEST
WARNING:

BEFORE ELECTRICAL POWER IS SUPPLIED TO THE AIRCRAFT, MAKE SURE THAT


ELECTRICAL CIRCUITS UPON WHICH WORK IS IN PROGRESS ARE ISOLATED.

WARNING:

BEFORE STARTING ENGINES, MAKE SURE THAT WARNING NOTICES ARE


POSITIONED MARKING DANGER AREAS.

WARNING:

ADMIT AUTHORIZED PERSONNEL ONLY AND MAKE SURE THAT THEY ARE
ADEQUATELY BRIEFED.

WARNING:

WEAR EAR DEFENDERS WHEN WORKING ON, OR IN THE VICINITY OF, RUNNING
ENGINES. DO NOT WEAR OTHER HEADGEAR OR LOOSE ARTICLES OF CLOTHING.

WARNING:

MAKE SURE THAT ADEQUATE FIRE FIGHTING FACILITIES ARE READILY


AVAILABLE.

WARNING:

MAKE SURE THAT AREA IN VICINITY OF PROPELLERS IS CLEAR AND FREE


FROM LOOSE OBJECTS.

1. Propeller Dynamic Balance (using the Dinamic Balancer/Analyzer Kit ITEM


61-10-14)
A.

Reason for the Job


To measure the vibration value of the propeller assembly and do the
Propeller Dynamic Balance if required.

B.

Equipment and Materials


ITEM

DESIGNATION

(1)

ITEM 20-15-01

Circuit Breakers Safety Clips and Tags

(2)

ITEM 23-00-02

Headsets

(3)

ITEM 61-10-14

Dynamic Balancer/Analyzer Kit

(4)

ITEM 61-10-21

Dynamic Balancer/Analyzer Harness

(5)

Standard Tool

Servicing Platform

(6)

Standard Tool

Ear Defenders

(7)

Standard Tool

Stopwatch

(8)

Standard Tool

Warning Notices

(9)

Z-24.301

Adhesive Tape

Effectivity: See TOC

61-10-00

Pag. 501
May 15/15

CN-235 MAINTENANCE MANUAL


DESIGNATION

ITEM
(10) AN970-3

Washer

(11) AN960-10

Washer

(12) AN960-10L

Washer

(13) NAS603-18

Screw

(14) MS21083

Nut

Referenced Procedures:
- 06-41-51,
- 06-41-54,
- 24-40-00,
- 61-10-10,
- 71-00-00,
- 71-20-00,
C.

P.
P.
P.
P.
P.
P.

Block
Block
Block
Block
Block
Block

1
1
201
401
501
1

- Access Provision - Interior


- Access Provision - Nacelles
- External Power
- Propeller Assembly
- Powerplant
- Mounts

Procedure
(1) Job Set-Up
(a) Put the aircraft in position facing into the wind. Make sure
that the dangerous area around the engine exhaust fumes is
clear.
(b) Put warning notices in position around aircraft prohibiting
unauthorized personnel or equipment.
(c) Make sure that all the landing gear wheels are chocked and
the Nose Landing Gear is centralized.
(d) Make sure that the fire fighting equipment is in position.
(e) Remove the engine intake covers, exhaust blanks, pitot head
covers and static vent plugs.
(f) Open, safety and tag with ITEM 20-15-01 these circuit
breakers:
PANEL

SERVICE

BATTERY BUS 1

START

KA1

L MISCELLANEOUS

SYNC PROP

KD1

Effectivity: See TOC

FIN

61-10-00

Pag. 502
May 15/15

CN-235 MAINTENANCE MANUAL


(g) Put the access platform in the applicable engine.
(2) Equipment Installation
(a) Velocimeters Installation on PGB (Fig. 501).
1

Remove the right forward cowling 412AR at the left


engine, and 422AR at the right engine
(Ref.06-41-54, P. Block 1).

Locate the bracket (3) that is installed in the Right


Anti-vibration Mount that attaches the right side of
the engine PGB to the forward mount
(Ref.71-20-00, P. Block 1).

Install the velocimeter (4) (p/n 7310 included in the


kit ITEM 61-10-14) in the bracket (3). Use the AN970-3
(2) washer and the 0,25-28 NYLOC Nut (1).
NOTE:

Make sure that the connector of the velocimeter


points to the RH at horizontal position .

Connect the connector (5) to the velocimeter connector.

(b) Installation of the Velocimeters Cables (Fig. 502).


1

Open the right access doors 413AR and 423AR


(Ref.06-41-54, P. Block 1).

Put the velocimeter cables (P/N:11212-100 included in


the kit ITEM 61-10-14) out of the engine through the
starter/generator air inlet.
CAUTION:

MAKE SURE THAT THERE IS NO INTERFERENCE


BETWEEN THE SECTION OF THE VELOCIMETER CABLE
INSIDE THE ENGINE COWLINGS AND THE ENGINE
CONTROL CABLES OR MOVING PARTS.

CAUTION:

MAKE SURE THAT THE SECTION OF THE VELOCIMETER


CABLE INSIDE THE ENGINE COWLINGS IS CLEAR
FROM HOT PARTS.

Close the right access doors 413AR and 423AR


(Ref.06-41-54, P. Block 1).

Put the velocimeter cables over the wings, along the


rear fuselage and inside the main compartment through

Effectivity: See TOC

61-10-00

Pag. 503
May 15/15

CN-235 MAINTENANCE MANUAL


the rear door.
CAUTION:
NOTE:
5

MAKE SURE NOT TO CLOSE THE REAR DOOR, THIS


CAN CAUSE DAMAGE TO THE CABLE.

For security, use tape Z-24.301 at intervals to


keep the cable held to the aircraft.

Put the velocimeter cables into the cockpit.


NOTE:

Put marks (LH or RH) in the cable ends to


indicate the propeller which signal transmit.

(c) Disconnection of the Syncrophaser Control Unit, KD3 (Fig.


503).
1

Open access pannel 222CR (Ref.06-41-51, P. Block 1).

In the electrical rack locate the Syncrophaser Control


Unit, KD3 (1).

Disconnect the electrical connector (3) from the


Syncrophaser Control Unit, KD3 (1). Put a cap on the
Syncrophaser Control Unit receptacle (2).

(d) Installation of the Test Equipment in the Cockpit (Fig.


504).
1

Put the Signal Selector (P/N 8520C included in the kit


ITEM 61-10-14) in the cockpit.

Put the Balancer/Analyzer (P/N 8500C included in the


kit ITEM 61-10-14) in the cockpit.

Connect the LH velocimeter cable (p/n 11210-100


included in the kit ITEM 61-10-14) to the connector of
the n 1 Velocimeter Channel of the Signal Selector
(p/n 8520C).

Connect the RH velocimeter cable (p/n 11210-100


included in the kit ITEM 61-10-14) to the connector of
the n 4 Velocimeter Channel of the Signal Selector
(p/n 8520C).

Connect the test harness ITEM 61-10-21 to the


previously disconnected connector KD3a.

Connect the test harness branch with the "LH PICK UP"
label to the Magnetic Pickup Channel A of the Signal
Selector (P/N 8520C included in the kit ITEM 61-10-14).

Effectivity: See TOC

61-10-00

Pag. 504
May 15/15

CN-235 MAINTENANCE MANUAL


7

Connect the test harness branch with the "RH PICK UP"
label to the Magnetic Pickup Channel B of the Signal
Selector (P/N 8520C included in the kit ITEM 61-10-14).

Connect the test harness branch with the "DC POWER"


label to the 28 VDC Power Connector of the Signal
Selector (P/N 8520C included in the kit ITEM 61-10-14).

Use the harness (p/n 10811-12 included in the kit ITEM


61-10-14) to connect the Output/Power Connector of the
Signal Selector (P/N 8520C) with the 28 VDC/SIGNAL
connector of the Balancer/Analyzer (P/N 8500C).

(e) Record the amount and bulkhead location of the previously


installed balance weights. Remove the propeller spinner if
required (Ref.61-10-10, P. Block 401).

Effectivity: See TOC

61-10-00

Pag. 505
May 15/15

CN-235 MAINTENANCE MANUAL


Velocimeters Installation

CM1.61.10.00.5AO.00.00-00

Fig. 501 Velocimeters Installation

Effectivity: See TOC

61-10-00

Pag. 506
May 15/15

CN-235 MAINTENANCE MANUAL


Velocimeters Cable installation on Aircraft

CM1.61.10.00.5BO.00.00-01

Fig. 502 Velocimeters Cable installation on Aircraft

Effectivity: See TOC

61-10-00

Pag. 507
May 15/15

CN-235 MAINTENANCE MANUAL


Syncrophaser Control Unit, KD3

CM1.61.10.00.5CO.00.00-01

Fig. 503 Syncrophaser Control Unit, KD3

Effectivity: See TOC

61-10-00

Pag. 508
May 15/15

CN-235 MAINTENANCE MANUAL


Test Equipment Installation in the Cockpit

CM1.61.10.00.5DO.00.00-01

Fig. 504 Test Equipment Installation in the Cockpit

Effectivity: See TOC

61-10-00

Pag. 509
May 15/15

CN-235 MAINTENANCE MANUAL


(3) Propeller Vibration Measurement
NOTE:

Before inserting the disk, make sure that it has the


applicable software.

NOTE:

During all the Vibration Measurement follow the step by


step instructions shown on the display of the
Balancer/Analyzer. Use the Chadwick-Helmuth's Model
8500/8500C+ Operators Manual for more data.

(a) Connect the GPU and switch on the aircraft electrical system
(Ref.24-40-00, P. Block 201). Make sure that the GPU is
positioned clear of the propeller wash.
(b) Close the following circuit breakers:
PANEL

SERVICE

FIN

BATTERY BUS 1

START

KA1

L MISCELLANEOUS

SYNC PROP

KD1

(c) Start the engines (Ref.71-00-00, P. Block 501).


NOTE:

Make sure that the wind speed value is not more than
10 knots and the aircraft is headed to the wind.

NOTE:

To avoid cross-talk interference, set the propeller


speed only on the engine which vibration you
measure.

NOTE:

If you only have to measure the unbalance value of


one engine, start only the affected engine.

(d) On the CONTROL QUADRANT, set to ON the PROP SYNC OFF, KD7
propeller synchronization switch. This switch is located
between the PL's and CL's.
NOTE:

This action supplies 28 VDC to the


Balancer/Analyzer.

(e) Make sure that, after approximately 45 seconds, the


Balancer/Analyzer completes its autotest satisfactorily and
shows the following options: BALANCE, SPECTRUM and TRACK.
NOTE:

Effectivity: See TOC

If required, adjust the knobs (1) and (2) to set the

61-10-00

Pag. 510
May 15/15

CN-235 MAINTENANCE MANUAL


contrast and backlight (Fig. 504).
NOTE:

In case an instrument malfunction remove the power


supply to the Balancer/Analyzer, this will reset the
instrument without erase the memory.

NOTE:

In case the instrument reset does not eliminate the


malfunction, do a cold start to erase the memory. To
do a cold start remove the power supply, then keep
pressed the START button while supply 28 VDC power.
Wait 5 seconds after release the START button.

(f) Get into BALANCE mode and select the appropriate balance
chart. If required show or print the chart info.
(g) Press the SETUP button to check the appropriate balance
parameters.
NOTE:

Make sure that the magnetic pick-up and velocimeter


input channels are the appropiated for the propeller
which vibration you measure. Modify as required.

NOTE:

Make sure that the balance parameters are the


appropriate.

(h) Move the Condition Levers to MAX and the Power Levers to FI.
(j) Adjust the PL until TQ value is 200 lbs and the CL until NP
value is 87 %.
NOTE:

Make sure that all engine parameters are stable.

NOTE:

To avoid cross-talk interference, set the propeller


speed only on the engine which vibration you
measure.

(k) Press START to start the vibration measurement.


(l) Do the steps (j) and (k) again adjusting the PL until TQ
value is 300 lbs and the CL until NP value is 97%.
(m) After the measurement, the unbalance value and is location
is shown on the Balancer/Analyzer screen.
(n) After the Balancer/Analyzer calculates a balance solution,
it is shown on the screen. Print the balance solution if
required.
NOTE:

Effectivity: See TOC

If balance weights were previously installed on the

61-10-00

Pag. 511
May 15/15

CN-235 MAINTENANCE MANUAL


bulkhead, enter the balance weights configuration at
this step. Print the new balance solution.
(p) Do the steps (f) thru ( n ) again for the other engine.
NOTE:

Make sure that the magnetic pick-up and velocimeter


input channels are the appropiated for the propeller
which vibration you measure. Modify as required.

NOTE:

Make sure that the balance parameters are the


appropriate.

(q) On the CONTROL QUADRANT, set to OFF the PROP SYNC OFF, KD7
propeller synchronization switch. This switch is located
between the PL's and CL's.
NOTE:

This action eliminates the 28 VDC power supply to


the Balancer/Analyzer.

(r) Stop the engines (Ref.71-00-00, P. Block 501).


(4) Propeller Balance (Fig. 505).
(a) If the value of the propeller unbalance is not more than
0,200 IPS no balance correction is required.
(b) If the value of the propeller unbalance is more than 0,200
IPS do the following procedure to correct the unbalance:
1

Remove the propeller spinner


(Ref.61-10-10, P. Block 401).

Locate, on the bulkhead (4), the balance points where


the balance weights are installed.

With the previously obtained balance solution select


the quantity and location of balance weights.

Effectivity: See TOC

NOTE:

The weight of one AN970-3 washer is 4,5 grams


(0,1 OZ).

NOTE:

The weight of one AN960-10 washer is 0,9 grams


(0,03 OZ).

NOTE:

The weight of one AN960-10L washer is 0,4 grams


(0,01 OZ).

NOTE:

The weight of one NAS603-18 screw is 4,5 grams


(0,1 OZ).

61-10-00

Pag. 512
May 15/15

CN-235 MAINTENANCE MANUAL


NOTE:
4

The weight of one MS21083 nut is 1,8 grams (0,06


OZ).

At each position, install one screw (1), one nut (3)


and the required quantity of washers (2). Torque
tighten to 30-40 lbs.inch (3,4-4,5 Nm) (above running
torque).
NOTE:

Do not install more than 9 washers AN970-3 for


each screw.

NOTE:

Do not install more than 6 screws for each


propeller.

NOTE:

Install a minimum of one flat washer on each


side of the bulkhead.

NOTE:

Install the balancing washers on the aft side of


the bulkhead.

Install the propeller spinner


(Ref.61-10-10, P. Block 401).

(5) Propeller Vibration Measurement


(a) Do the propeller vibration measurement again, refer to
paragraph 1.C.(3).
NOTE:

If after some runs you can not decrease the


unbalance to a value lower than 0,2 IPS check:
- The aircraft continues headed to the wind
- The wind speed value is lower than 10 Knots
- The test equipment is correctly installed and
operative
- The spinner is correctly installed
- Do a check of the weight of the balance screws,
washers and nuts.

NOTE:

If after some runs you can not decrease the


unbalance to a value lower than 0,2 IPS interchange
the two blades of the unbalance position. In this
case remove the balance weights before the next run.

NOTE:

When the difference between the vibration values


(for High and Low Torque condition) is more than 0,4
IPS it can be impossible to balance the propeller

Effectivity: See TOC

61-10-00

Pag. 513
May 15/15

CN-235 MAINTENANCE MANUAL


(Refer to Model 8500 Maintenance and Operator
Manuals):
- Low Torque: CL MAX and PL GI
- High Torque: CL 90% Np and PL 300 lb.ft.
(b) If propeller can not be balanced remove the propeller
assembly from aircraft (Ref.61-10-10, P. Block 401).
(c) Record the number and location of dynamic balance weights,
if they have been reconfigured, in the logbook.
(6) Close Up
(a) Open, safety and tag with ITEM 20-15-01 these circuit
breakers:
PANEL

SERVICE

FIN

BATTERY BUS 1

START

KA1

L MISCELLANEOUS

SYNC PROP

KD1

(b) Disconnect the test connectors from the signal selector.


(c) Put the access platform in the applicable engine.
(d) Open the right access doors 413AR and 423AR
(Ref.06-41-54, P. Block 1).
(e) Disconnect the connectors from the velocimeters. Remove the
velocimeter harness from the aircraft.
(f) Remove the velocimeters from the engines.
(g) Close the right access doors 413AR and 423AR
(Ref.06-41-54, P. Block 1).
(h) Install the right forward cowling 412AR at the left engine,
and 422AR at the right engine (Ref.06-41-54, P. Block 1).
(j) In the electrical rack locate the Syncrophaser Control Unit,
KD3 (1). Remove the electrical cap from the connector of the
Syncrophaser Control Unit, KD3 (Fig. 503).
(k) Disconnect the test harness ITEM 61-10-21 from the
previously connected connector.

Effectivity: See TOC

61-10-00

Pag. 514
May 15/15

CN-235 MAINTENANCE MANUAL


(l) Connect the electrical connector (3) to the Syncrophaser
Control Unit, KD3 (1)(Fig. 503).
(m) Close access pannel 222CR (Ref.06-41-51, P. Block 1).
(n) Remove the Signal Selector and the Balancer/Analyzer from
the cockpit.

Effectivity: See TOC

61-10-00

Pag. 515
May 15/15

CN-235 MAINTENANCE MANUAL


Propeller Balance Weights Installation

CM1.61.10.00.5EO.00.00-00

Fig. 505 Propeller Balance Weights Installation

Effectivity: See TOC

61-10-00

Pag. 516
May 15/15

CN-235 MAINTENANCE MANUAL


2. Propeller Dynamic Balance (using the Aircraft Vibration Analysis and
Control Equipment, Chadwick VXP ITEM 61-10-20)
A.

Reason for the Job


To measure the vibration value of the propeller assembly and do the
Propeller Dynamic Balance if required.

B.

Equipment and Materials


ITEM

DESIGNATION

(1)

ITEM 20-15-01

Circuit Breakers Safety Clips and Tags

(2)

ITEM 23-00-02

Headsets

(3)

ITEM 61-10-20

Aircraft Vibration Analysis and Control


Equipment, Chadwick VXP

(4)

ITEM 61-10-21

Dynamic Balancer/Analyzer Harness

(5)

Standard Tool

Servicing Platform

(6)

Standard Tool

Ear Defenders

(7)

Standard Tool

Stopwatch

(8)

Standard Tool

Warning Notices

(9)

Z-24.301

Adhesive Tape

(10) AN970-3

Washer

(11) AN960-10

Washer

(12) AN960-10L

Washer

(13) NAS603-18

Screw

(14) MS21083

Nut

Referenced Procedures:
- 06-41-51,
- 06-41-54,
- 24-40-00,
- 61-10-10,
- 71-00-00,
- 71-20-00,
C.

P.
P.
P.
P.
P.
P.

Block
Block
Block
Block
Block
Block

1
1
201
401
501
1

- Access Provision - Interior


- Access Provision - Nacelles
- External Power
- Propeller Assembly
- Powerplant
- Mounts

Procedure
(1) Job Set-Up

Effectivity: See TOC

61-10-00

Pag. 517
May 15/15

CN-235 MAINTENANCE MANUAL


(a) Put the aircraft in position facing into the wind. Make sure
that the dangerous area around the engine exhaust fumes is
clear.
(b) Put warning notices in position around aircraft prohibiting
unauthorized personnel or equipment.
(c) Make sure that all the landing gear wheels are chocked and
the Nose Landing Gear is centralized.
(d) Make sure that the fire fighting equipment is in position.
(e) Remove the engine intake covers, exhaust blanks, pitot head
covers and static vent plugs.
(f) Open, safety and tag with ITEM 20-15-01 these circuit
breakers:
PANEL

SERVICE

FIN

BATTERY BUS 1

START

KA1

L MISCELLANEOUS

SYNC PROP

KD1

(g) Put the access platform in the applicable engine.


(2) Equipment Installation
(a) Velocimeters Installation on PGB (Fig. 501).
1

Remove the right forward cowling 412AR at the left


engine, and 422AR at the right engine
(Ref.06-41-54, P. Block 1).

Locate the bracket (3) that is installed in the Right


Anti-vibration Mount that attaches the right side of
the engine PGB to the forward mount
(Ref.71-20-00, P. Block 1).

Install the velocimeter (4) (p/n 7310 included in the


kit ITEM 61-10-20 ) in the bracket (3). Use the AN970-3
(2) washer and the 0,25-28 NYLOC Nut (1).
NOTE:

Effectivity: See TOC

Make sure that the connector of the velocimeter


points to the RH at horizontal position.

Connect the connector (5) to the velocimeter connector.

61-10-00

Pag. 518
May 15/15

CN-235 MAINTENANCE MANUAL


(b) Installation of the Velocimeters Cables (Fig. 502).
1

Open the right access doors 413AR and 423AR


(Ref.06-41-54, P. Block 1).

Put the velocimeter cables (P/N:11212-100 included in


the kit ITEM 61-10-20) out of the engine through the
starter/generator air inlet.
CAUTION:

MAKE SURE THAT THERE IS NO INTERFERENCE


BETWEEN THE SECTION OF THE VELOCIMETER CABLE
INSIDE THE ENGINE COWLINGS AND THE ENGINE
CONTROL CABLES OR MOVING PARTS.

CAUTION:

MAKE SURE THAT THE SECTION OF THE VELOCIMETER


CABLE INSIDE THE ENGINE COWLINGS IS CLEAR
FROM HOT PARTS.

Close the right access doors 413AR and 423AR


(Ref.06-41-54, P. Block 1).

Put the velocimeter cables over the wings, along the


rear fuselage and inside the main compartment through
the rear door.
CAUTION:
NOTE:

MAKE SURE NOT TO CLOSE THE REAR DOOR, THIS


CAN CAUSE DAMAGE TO THE CABLE.

For security, use tape Z-24.301 at intervals to


keep the cable held to the aircraft.

Put the velocimeter cables into the cockpit.


NOTE:

Put marks (LH or RH) in the cable ends to


indicate the propeller which signal transmit.

(c) Disconnection of the Syncrophaser Control Unit, KD3 (Fig.


503).
1

Open access pannel 222CR (Ref.06-41-51, P. Block 1).

In the electrical rack locate the Syncrophaser Control


Unit, KD3 (1).

Effectivity: See TOC

61-10-00

Pag. 519
May 15/15

CN-235 MAINTENANCE MANUAL


3

Disconnect the electrical connector (3) from the


Syncrophaser Control Unit, KD3 (1). Put a cap on the
Syncrophaser Control Unit receptacle (2).

(d) Installation of the Test Equipment in the Cockpit (Fig.


506).
1

Put the VXP Acquisition Unit (VXP AU) (P/N 15160-2


included in the kit ITEM 61-10-20) in the cockpit.

Put the VXP Display Unit (VXP DU) (P/N 17330-1 included
in the kit ITEM 61-10-20) in the cockpit, as well as
Printer P/N 14492.

Connect the LH velocimeter cable (p/n 11210-100


included in the kit ITEM 61-10-20) to the connector of
the n 1 Velocimeter Channel of the VXP AU (p/n
15160-2).

Connect the RH velocimeter cable (p/n 11210-100


included in the kit ITEM 61-10-20) to the connector of
the n 2 Velocimeter Channel of the VXP AU (p/n
15160-2).

Connect the test harness ITEM 61-10-21 to the


previously disconnected connector KD3a.

Connect the test harness branch with the "LH PICK UP"
label to the Magnetic Pickup Channel A of the VXP AU
(P/N 15160-2 included in the kit ITEM 61-10-20).

Connect the test harness branch with the "RH PICK UP"
label to the Magnetic Pickup Channel B of the VXP AU
(P/N 15160-2 included in the kit ITEM 61-10-20).

Connect the test harness branch with the "DC POWER"


label to the 28 VDC Power Connector of the VXP AU (P/N
15160-2 included in the kit ITEM 61-10-20).

Use the harness P/N 17317-12A to link the connector of


the VXP AU (labeled COMPUTER) with the RS-232 COM
port input connector of the VXP DU (Display Unit,
PANASONIC TOUGHBOOK laptop Computer) using the orange
branch cable. Connect as well the associated DC power
connector to the relevant power input connector of
computer. Use the black branch of harness P/N 17317-12A
to connect to the printer P/N 14492, including the
power connector.

Effectivity: See TOC

61-10-00

Pag. 520
May 15/15

CN-235 MAINTENANCE MANUAL


Test Equipment Installation in the Cockpit

CM1.61.10.00.5FO.00.00-01

Fig. 506 Test Equipment Installation in the Cockpit

Effectivity: See TOC

61-10-00

Pag. 521
May 15/15

CN-235 MAINTENANCE MANUAL


(e) Record the amount and bulkhead location of the previously
installed balance weights. Remove the propeller spinner if
required (Ref.61-10-10, P. Block 401).
(3) Propeller Vibration Measurement
NOTE:

During all the Vibration Measurement follow the step by


step instructions shown on the display of the VXP DU. Use
the Honeywell's model VXP manual for more data.

(a) Connect the GPU and switch on the aircraft electrical system
(Ref.24-40-00, P. Block 201). Make sure that the GPU is
positioned clear of the propeller wash.
NOTE:

Make sure that the battery is not completely flat.

(b) Close the following circuit breakers:


PANEL

SERVICE

FIN

BATTERY BUS 1

START

KA1

L MISCELLANEOUS

SYNC PROP

KD1

(c) Start the engines (Ref.71-00-00, P. Block 501).


NOTE:

Make sure that the wind speed value is not more than
10 knots and the aircraft is headed to the wind.

NOTE:

To avoid cross-talk interference, set the propeller


speed only on the engine which vibration you
measure.

NOTE:

If you only have to measure the unbalance value of


one engine, start only the affected engine.

(d) On the CONTROL QUADRANT, set to ON the PROP SYNC OFF, KD7
propeller synchronization switch. This switch is located
between the PL's and CL's.
NOTE:

This action supplies 28 VDC to the VXP DU.

(e) Switch on the Display unit (PANASONIC TOUGHBOOK COMPUTER).


NOTE:

Effectivity: See TOC

Microsoft WINDOWS will start automatically the VXP


Display program. If not, load the CN235 APPLICATION

61-10-00

Pag. 522
May 15/15

CN-235 MAINTENANCE MANUAL


(APP) software from the flash memory included within
the kit (Refer to VXP operating instruction).
(f) Adjust the PL until TQ value is 200 lbs and the CL until NP
value is 87 %.
NOTE:

Make sure that all engine parameters are stable.

NOTE:

To avoid cross-talk interference, set the propeller


speed only on the engine which vibration you
measure.

(g) Start the data acquisition by clicking the button related to


the propeller being worked.
(h) Do the steps (f) and (g) again adjusting the PL until TQ
value is 300 lbs and the CL until NP value is 97%.
(j) After the measurement, the unbalance value and is location
is shown on the VXP DU screen.
(k) After the VXP DU calculates a balance solution, it is shown
on the screen. Print the balance solution if required with
the Printer (p/n 14492).
NOTE:

If balance weights were previously installed on the


bulkhead, enter the balance weights configuration at
this step. Print the new balance solution.

(l) Do the steps (f) thru ( k ) again for the other engine.
NOTE:

Make sure that the magnetic pick-up and velocimeter


input channels are the appropiated for the propeller
which vibration you measure. Modify as required.

NOTE:

Make sure that the balance parameters are the


appropriate.

(m) On the CONTROL QUADRANT, set to OFF the PROP SYNC OFF, KD7
propeller synchronization switch. This switch is located
between the PL's and CL's.
NOTE:

This action eliminates the 28 VDC power supply to


the VXP DU.

(n) Stop the engines (Ref.71-00-00, P. Block 501).


(4) Propeller Balance (Fig. 505).

Effectivity: See TOC

61-10-00

Pag. 523
May 15/15

CN-235 MAINTENANCE MANUAL


(a) If the value of the propeller unbalance is not more than
0,200 IPS no balance correction is required.
(b) If the value of the propeller unbalance is more than 0,200
IPS do the following procedure to correct the unbalance:
1

Remove the propeller spinner


(Ref.61-10-10, P. Block 401).

Locate, on the bulkhead (4), the balance points where


the balance weights are installed.

With the previously obtained balance solution select


the quantity and location of balance weights.

Effectivity: See TOC

NOTE:

The weight of one AN970-3 washer is 4,5 grams


(0,1 OZ).

NOTE:

The weight of one AN960-10 washer is 0,9 grams


(0,03 OZ).

NOTE:

The weight of one AN960-10L washer is 0,4 grams


(0,01 OZ).

NOTE:

The weight of one NAS603-18 screw is 4,5 grams


(0,1 OZ).

NOTE:

The weight of one MS21083 nut is 1,8 grams (0,06


OZ).

At each position, install one screw (1), one nut (3)


and the required quantity of washers (2). Torque
tighten to 30-40 lbs.inch (3,4-4,5 Nm) (above running
torque).
NOTE:

Do not install more than 9 washers AN970-3 for


each screw.

NOTE:

Do not install more than 6 screws for each


propeller.

NOTE:

Install a minimum of one flat washer on each


side of the bulkhead.

NOTE:

Install the balancing washers on the aft side of


the bulkhead.

61-10-00

Pag. 524
May 15/15

CN-235 MAINTENANCE MANUAL


5

Install the propeller spinner


(Ref.61-10-10, P. Block 401).

(5) Propeller Vibration Measurement


(a) Do the propeller vibration measurement again, refer to
paragraph 2.C.(3).
NOTE:

If after some runs you can not decrease the


unbalance to a value lower than 0,2 IPS check:
- The aircraft continues headed to the wind
- The wind speed value is lower than 10 Knots
- The test equipment is correctly installed and
operative
- The spinner is correctly installed
- Do a Check of the weight of the balance screws,
washers and nuts.

NOTE:

If after some runs you can not decrease the


unbalance to a value lower than 0,2 IPS interchange
the two blades of the unbalance position. In this
case remove the balance weights before the next run.

NOTE:

When the difference between the vibration values


(for High and Low Torque condition) is more than 0,4
IPS it can be impossible to balance the propeller
(Refer to Model VXP Maintenance and Operator
Manuals):
- Low Torque: CL MAX and PL GI
- High Torque: CL 90% Np and PL 300 lb.ft.

(b) If propeller can not be balanced remove the propeller


assembly from aircraft (Ref.61-10-10, P. Block 401).
(c) Record the number and location of dynamic balance weights,
if they have been reconfigured, in the logbook.
(6) Close Up
(a) Open, safety and tag with ITEM 20-15-01 these circuit
breakers:

Effectivity: See TOC

61-10-00

Pag. 525
May 15/15

CN-235 MAINTENANCE MANUAL


PANEL

SERVICE

FIN

BATTERY BUS 1

START

KA1

L MISCELLANEOUS

SYNC PROP

KD1

(b) Disconnect the test connectors from the VXP AU.


(c) Put the access platform in the applicable engine.
(d) Open the right access doors 413AR and 423AR
(Ref.06-41-54, P. Block 1).
(e) Disconnect the connectors from the velocimeters. Remove the
velocimeter harness from the aircraft.
(f) Remove the velocimeters from the engines.
(g) Close the right access doors 413AR and 423AR
(Ref.06-41-54, P. Block 1).
(h) Install the right forward cowling 412AR at the left engine,
and 422AR at the right engine (Ref.06-41-54, P. Block 1).
(j) In the electrical rack locate the Syncrophaser Control Unit,
KD3 (1). Remove the electrical cap from the connector of the
Syncrophaser Control Unit, KD3 (Fig. 503).
(k) Disconnect the test harness ITEM 61-10-21 from the
previously connected connector.
(l) Connect the electrical connector (3) to the Syncrophaser
Control Unit, KD3 (1)(Fig. 503).
(m) Close access pannel 222CR (Ref.06-41-51, P. Block 1).
(n) Remove the VXP AU and the VXP DU from the cockpit.

Effectivity: See TOC

61-10-00

Pag. 526
May 15/15

CN-235 MAINTENANCE MANUAL


PROPELLER ASSEMBLY
INSPECTION/CHECK
WARNING:

BEFORE DOING ANY MAINTENANCE WORK, PUT WARNING NOTICES IN FLIGHT


COMPARTMENT PREVENTING STARTING OR GROUND RUNNING OF RELEVANT
ENGINE.

WARNING:

MAKE CERTAIN THAT RELEVANT ELECTRICAL CIRCUITS ARE ISOLATED.

WARNING:

THE SYNTHETIC OIL USED HAS TOXIC ADDITIVES, WEAR PROTECTIVE


CLOTHING. IN CASES OF CONTAMINATION OF SKIN OR EYES, WASH WITH
LARGE QUANTITIES OF CLEAN WATER, AND SEEK IMMEDIATE MEDICAL
ATTENTION.

WARNING:

PETROLEUM SOLVENT, AMS 3160, IS TOXIC. USE ONLY IN WELL VENTILATED


AREA. DO NOT BREATHE FUMES. KEEP PETROLEUM SOLVENT OFF SKIN AND
WEAR GOGGLES. IN CASES OF CONTAMINATION OR INHALATION, WASH
AFFECTED AREAS WITH MILD SOAP AND WATER, AND SEEK IMMEDIATE MEDICAL
ATTENTION.

CAUTION:

SYNTHETIC OIL CAN CAUSE DAMAGE TO PAINTWORK AND CERTAIN TYPES OF


RUBBER. AVOID CONTAMINATION OF AIRCRAFT STRUCTURE AND SYSTEMS. OIL
SPILLAGE MUST BE REMOVED IMMEDIATELY.

1. General Check of the Propeller Assembly


A.

Definition of Terms
(1) Depression
Impression caused by the compression or removal of material from
a given surface. Usually, it is small with a small depth.
(2) Gouge
Impression usually caused by the removal and, in second instance,
compression of material.
(3) Scratch
Impression caused by the removal of material. Usually, it is a
fibre breakage caused by the impact of sharp objects.
(4) Crack

Effectivity: See TOC

61-10-00

Pag. 601
May. 15/15

CN-235 MAINTENANCE MANUAL


Irregular shaped separation of material, usually with a narrow
opening at the surface and caused by impact.
(5) Debond
Separation of the nickel leading edge sheath.
(6) Delamination
Separation of the Glass-Reinforced Plastic (GRP).
B.

Equipment and Materials


ITEM

DESIGNATION

(1)

ITEM 20-15-01

Circuit Breaker Safety Clips and Tags

(2)

Standard Tool

Servicing Platform, 2 m (6.5 ft)

(3)

Standard Tool

Warning Notices

Referenced Procedures:
- 61-10-00, P. Block 701
- Propeller Assembly
- 61-10-10, P. Block 401
- Propeller Assembly
- CMM 61-13-03, P. Block 601 - Variable Pitch Aircraft Propeller
C.

Procedure
(1) Job Set-Up
(a) Open, safety and tag, with ITEM 20-15-01, the circuit
breaker:
PANEL

SERVICE

BATTERY BUS 1

START

FIN
KA1

(b) Put the warning notices in the flight compartment telling


personnel not to start or ground run the relevant engine.
(c) Put the servicing platform in position below the related
engine.
(d) Remove the spinner (Ref. 61-10-10, P. Block 401).

Effectivity: See TOC

61-10-00

Pag. 602
May. 15/15

CN-235 MAINTENANCE MANUAL


(e) Clean the propeller assembly (Ref. 61-10-00, P. Block 701).
(2) Examine the nickel leading edge sheath on each propeller blade
for damage and debond. Replace or repair the propellers which
show:
(a) A sheath debond larger than 0 .125 in (3,125 mm) .
(b) Cracks in the sheath nearer than 0.5 in (12,7 mm) to each
other or nearer than 1.0 in (25,4 mm) to the blade tip.
(c) Sheaths with a chip area larger than 0.062 in (1,59 mm)
diameter .
(d) A sheath debond adjacent to cracks.
(3) Examine the blades for erosion, damage and lightening strike.
Replace or repair the propellers which show:
NOTE:

Scratches and gouges which have not penetrated thru the


GRP to expose the foam filling need not be repaired
providing the damaged area does not exceed 0.75 in 2 (4,8
cm2). The blades with erosion must be repaired (Ref. CMM
of Hamilton 61-13-03).

(a) Evidence of blade delamination related to the sheath cracks.


(b) Depressions in the blade GRP larger than 0.5 in (12,7 mm)
diameter or length, or nearer than 2.0 in (50,8 mm) to other
depression. A maximum of four depressions in a distance of
12.0 in (305 mm) is permitted.
(c) Depressions nearer than 4 .0 in (101,5 mm) to the inboard end
of the sheath, or nearer than 0.25 in (6,350 mm) to the
sheath trailing edge.
(d) Evidence of a lighting strike, shown as dark and discolored
areas at the blade tip.
(4) Examine the blade retaining rings for cracks, scratches and
gouges . If found, replace or repair the propeller.
(5) Hub Assembly

Effectivity: See TOC

61-10-00

Pag. 603
May. 15/15

CN-235 MAINTENANCE MANUAL


(a) Examine the hub assembly for cracks, oil leaks, corrosion,
wear and security of attachment. Reject the propeller if
damages are found.
(b) Examine the blade heater wires for safety conditions and
deterioration of the insulators . Repair or replace as
necessary.
(c) Clean the slip rings on the rear part of the hub back-plate
(Ref.61-10-00, P. Block 701). Do an inspection of the slip
rings for damage and corrosion. The maximum groove depth
permitted in the ring is 0.004 in (0,102 mm). The
erosion-resistant coating must be intact. Reject the
propeller if the values are more than the maximum permitted.
(6) Spinner
(a) Examine the spinner for damage, corrosion and security of
tri-wing securing screws. Repair or replace as necessary.
(7) Close-Up
(a) Make sure that the work area is clean and clear of tools,
equipment and loose objects.
(b) Install the spinner (Ref. 61-10-10, P. Block 401).
(c) Remove the servicing platform.
(d) Remove the warning notices from the flight compartment.
(e) Remove the safety clip and tag, ITEM 20-15-01, and close
START circuit breaker, KA1.
** On A/C: Series 300
2. Inspection of the Blades Nickel Sheath
A.

Reason for the Job


To do the 61.10.00.05 MRB task (MRB Document PV02M), "Detailed visual
inspection of Blades Nickel Sheath Trailing Edge for separation
evidence".

B.

Equipment and Materials

Effectivity: See TOC

61-10-00

Pag. 604
May. 15/15

CN-235 MAINTENANCE MANUAL


ITEM

DESIGNATION

(1)

ITEM 20-15-01

Circuit Breaker Safety Clips and Tags

(2)

Standard Tool

Servicing Platform, 2 m (6,5 ft)

(3)

Standard Tool

Warning Notices

Referenced Procedures:
- 61-10-00, P. Block 701
C.

- Propeller Assembly

Procedure
(1) Job Set-Up
(a) Open, safety and tag, with ITEM 20-15-01, the circuit
breaker:
PANEL

SERVICE

BATTERY BUS 1

START

FIN
KA1

(b) Put the warning notices in the flight compartment telling


personnel not to start or ground run the relevant engine.
(c) Put the servicing platform in position below the related
engine.
(d) Clean the blades of the propeller assembly if necessary
(Ref.61-10-00, P. Block 701).
(2) Inspection
(a) Do an inspection of the nickel sheath leading edge on each
propeller blade for damage and debond. Replace or repair the
blades that show:
1

A sheath debond larger than 0.125 in (3,125 mm).

Cracks in the sheath nearer than 0.5 in (12,7 mm) to


each other or nearer than 1.0 in (25,4 mm) to the blade
end.

A sheath with a chip area larger than 0.062 in (1,59 mm)


of diameter.

Effectivity: See TOC

61-10-00

Pag. 605
May. 15/15

CN-235 MAINTENANCE MANUAL


4

Sheath debonds adjacent to cracks.

(3) Close Up
(a) Remove the servicing platform.
(b) Remove the safety clip and tag, ITEM 20-15-01, and close the
circuit breaker:
PANEL

SERVICE

BATTERY BUS 1

START

FIN
KA1

(c) Remove the warning notices from the flight compartment.


(d) Remove all tools and equipment from the work area. Make sure
that the work area is clean.
3. General Visual Inspection of the Propeller Assembly
A.

Reason for the Job


To do the 61.10.00.02 MRB task (MRB Document PV02M), "General visual
inspection of Propeller Assembly for general condition (ground
level)".

B.

Equipment and Materials


ITEM

C.

DESIGNATION

(1)

ITEM 20-15-01

Circuit Breaker Safety Clips and Tags

(2)

Standard Tool

Warning Notices

Procedure
(1) Job Set-Up
(a) Open, safety and tag, with ITEM 20-15-01, the circuit
breaker:
PANEL

Effectivity: See TOC

SERVICE

FIN

61-10-00

Pag. 606
May. 15/15

PANEL

PANEL

SERVICE

FIN

CN-235 MAINTENANCE MANUAL


SERVICE

BATTERY BUS 1

START

FIN

KA1

(b) Put the warning notices in the flight compartment telling


personnel not to start or ground run the relevant engine.
(c) Put the servicing platform in position below the related
engine.
(d) Clean the blades of the propeller assembly if necessary
(Ref.61-10-00, P. Block 701).
(2) Inspection
(a) Do a general visual inspection of the blades for:
- Surface damage on the two sides of the blade. Examine the
blades for signs of dents, nicks, scratches, and corrosion.
Repair if necessary.
- Evidence of erosion. Repair if necessary .
- Cracks and delamination on the surfaces and edges. Small
stone impacts can create delaminations or microcracks and
let the moisture go into the blade. When the moisture
freezes into the blade it causes delaminations.
- Examine the blade for straightness. Examine the edges to
find deformations.
- Examine the blade for looseness. Move the blades to find
unusual changes in looseness and play . Blade-to-blade
differences indicate that an internal problem can exist.
- Correct bonding between the blade de-ice heaters and the
propeller assembly.
- Cracks and debonds on the nickel sheath. Repair if
necessary.
(b) Examine for oil and grease leakages. Examine for oil or
lubricant leaks the unusual areas, such as outside surfaces
and seals. A seal failure or a crack can cause oil or grease
leakages. The source of the oil or grease leak should be
determined before flight.
(c) Examine the Spinner and Bulkhead. Externally examine the
spinner and bulkhead for security, missing fasteners,

Effectivity: See TOC

61-10-00

Pag. 607
May. 15/15

CN-235 MAINTENANCE MANUAL


damage, and cracks. Cracks typically originate from the
attachment screws.
(d) Examine the propeller for general condition. Examine for
loose wires, grease fittings and debris.
(3) Close Up
(a) Remove the safety clip and tag, ITEM 20-15-01 and close the
circuit breaker:
PANEL

SERVICE

BATTERY BUS 1

START

FIN
KA1

(b) Remove the warning notices from the flight compartment.


(c) Remove all tools and equipment from the work area. Make sure
that the work area is clean.
4. Mandatory Inspections of the Propeller Assembly
A.

Reason for the Job


To do the 61.10.00.04 MRB task (MRB Document PV02M), "Perform all
Propeller Assembly Maintenance Tasks included in the 'Airworthiness
Limitation' Section of the Hamilton Standard's Maintenance Manual
P5209, latest revision".

B.

Equipment and Materials


ITEM
(1)

DESIGNATION
Standard Tool

Warning Notices

Referenced Procedures:
- CMM 61-00-00
C.

- Propeller System - Airworthiness


Limitations

Procedure
(1) Do all the Propeller Maintenance Tasks included in the
"Airworthiness Limitations" section of the Hamilton Standard's
Maintenance Manual 14RF-37 (Ref.CMM 61-00-00).

Effectivity: See TOC

61-10-00

Pag. 608
May. 15/15

CN-235 MAINTENANCE MANUAL


** On A/C: All

Effectivity: See TOC

61-10-00

Pag. 609
May. 15/15

CN-235 MAINTENANCE MANUAL

INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK

Effectivity: See TOC

61-10-00

Pag. 610
May. 15/15

CN-235 MAINTENANCE MANUAL


PROPELLER ASSEMBLY
CLEANING/PAINTING
WARNING:

BEFORE DOING ANY MAINTENANCE WORK, PUT WARNING NOTICES IN FLIGHT


COMPARTMENT PREVENTING STARTING OR GROUND RUNNING OF RELEVANT
ENGINE.

WARNING:

PETROLEUM SOLVENT, AMS 3160, IS TOXIC. USE ONLY IN WELL VENTILATED


AREA. DO NOT BREATHE FUMES. KEEP PETROLEUM SOLVENT OFF SKIN AND
WEAR GOGGLES. IN CASES OF CONTAMINATION OR INHALATION, WASH
AFFECTED AREAS WITH MILD SOAP AND WATER, AND SEEK IMMEDIATE MEDICAL
ATTENTION.

WARNING:

MAKE CERTAIN THAT RELEVANT ELECTRICAL CIRCUITS ARE ISOLATED.

CAUTION:

DO NOT LET PETROLEUM SOLVENT COME INTO CONTACT WITH RUBBER, PLASTIC
OR GRP PARTS. WIPE OFF ANY SPILLAGE IMMEDIATELY.

1. Equipment and Materials


ITEM

DESIGNATION

A.

Z-23.146

Cleaning Compound

B.

Z-23.139

Petroleum Solvent (or equivalent)

C.

Z-24.907

Rubber Protective Gloves

D.

Goggles

E.

Z-24.930

Soft Lint-free Cloth

F.

Nylon Abrasive Pad

Referenced Procedures:
- 61-10-10, P. Block 401

- Propeller Assembly

2. Procedure
A.

Job Set-Up
(1) Open, safety and tag the following circuit breaker:.
PANEL

SERVICE

BATTERY BUS 1

START

Effectivity: See TOC

FIN
KA1

61-10-00

Pag. 701
Mar. 31/00

CN-235 MAINTENANCE MANUAL


(2) Put notices in flight compartment warning against starting or
ground running of relevant engine.
(3) Put access platform under relevant propeller.
(4) Remove spinner (Ref. 61-10-10, P. Block 401).
B.

Cleaning
(1) Wearing gogles and rubber protective gloves. Clean spinner and
metallic external surfaces of the propeller with approved solvent
Z-23.139 (or equivalent).
NOTE:

Apply solvent sparingly with a soft cloth or brush.

(2) Remove solvent by thoroughly rinsing with fresh water. Wipe dry
with a soft cloth.
(3) Clean all rubber, plastic and blade GRP surfaces with a mild soap
and warm water solution and a soft cloth. Rinse with fresh water
and dry with a soft cloth.
(4) Dampen a four-inch square piece of nylon abrassive pad with
cleaning compound Z-23.146 .
(5) Scrub slip-rings and adjacent GRP until clean in accordance with
the following limits:
(a) GRP using a bright light inspect for black oil, graphite
sludge or residue remains in or around ring. Slight residue
only is permissable in ID or OD radius of slip-rings.
(b) Slip-rings should have a clean copper finish with slight
residue permitted in pitting or grooves in the rings.
(6) Wipe slip-rings and GRP with a clean, soft lint-free cloth until
thoroughly dry.
NOTE:
C.

Make certain that GRP is completely dry of cleaning


fluid.

Close-Up
(1) Make certain that work area is clean and clear of tools,
equipment and loose objects.
(2) Install spinner (Ref. 61-10-10, P. Block 401).

Effectivity: See TOC

61-10-00

Pag. 702
Mar. 31/00

CN-235 MAINTENANCE MANUAL


(3) Remove access platform from propeller area.
(4) Remove safety clip and tag and close START circuit breaker KA1
(Ref. para. 2 A (1)).
(5) Remove warning notices from flight compartment.

Effectivity: See TOC

61-10-00

Pag. 703
Mar. 31/00

CN-235 MAINTENANCE MANUAL

INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK

Effectivity: See TOC

61-10-00

Pag. 704
Mar. 31/00

CN-235 MAINTENANCE MANUAL


PROPELLER ASSEMBLY
REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
WARNING:

MAKE SURE THAT RELEVANT ELECTRICAL CIRCUITS ARE ISOLATED.

WARNING:

THE SYNTHETIC OIL USED CONTAINS TOXIC ADDITIVES. WEAR PROTECTIVE


CLOTHING. IN CASE OF CONTAMINATION OF SKIN OR EYES, WASH WITH LARGE
QUANTITIES OF CLEAN WATER, AND SEEK IMMEDIATE MEDICAL ATTENTION.

WARNING:

BE CAREFUL WHEN YOU USE OILS AND GREASES.


OBEY THE MATERIAL MANUFACTURER'S INSTRUCTIONS AND THE LOCAL
REGULATIONS.
USE PROTECTIVE CLOTHING, GOGGLES AND GLOVES.
IF YOU GET OIL AND GREASE:
- ON YOUR SKIN, REMOVE IT WITH SOAP AND CLEAN WATER
- IN YOUR EYES OR IN YOUR MOUTH, FLUSH IT AWAY WITH CLEAN WATER
- GET MEDICAL AID.
IN GENERAL, OILS AND GREASES ARE POISONOUS AND SKIN IRRITANTS.

WARNING:

BE CAREFUL WHEN YOU USE SOLVENTS/CLEANING AGENTS, SEALANTS AND


OTHER MATERIALS.
OBEY THE MATERIAL MANUFACTURER'S INSTRUCTIONS AND THE LOCAL
REGULATIONS.
MAKE SURE THAT THERE IS A GOOD FLOW OF AIR THROUGH THE WORK AREA.
DO NOT BREATHE THE FUMES.
DO NOT SMOKE.
DO NOT USE THESE MATERIALS NEAR A FLAME, SPARKS OR SOURCES OF HEAT.
USE PROTECTIVE CLOTHING, GOGGLES AND GLOVES.
IF YOU GET ONE OF THESE MATERIALS:
- ON YOUR SKIN OR IN YOUR EYES, FLUSH IT AWAY WITH A FLOW OF CLEAN
WATER
- IN YOUR MOUTH, GET IMMEDIATE MEDICAL AID.
IN GENERAL, THESE MATERIALS ARE FLAMMABLE, POISONOUS AND SKIN
IRRITANTS.

CAUTION:

SYNTHETIC OIL CAN CAUSE DAMAGE TO PAINTWORK AND CERTAIN TYPES OF


RUBBER. AVOID CONTAMINATION OF AIRCRAFT STRUCTURE AND SYSTEMS. OIL
SPILLAGE MUST BE REMOVED IMMEDIATELY.

Effectivity: See TOC

61-10-10

Pag. 401
May 15/13

CN-235 MAINTENANCE MANUAL


CAUTION:

TAKE STRINGENT PRECAUTIONS TO AVOID CONTAMINATION OF THE OIL


SYSTEM. INSTALL PROTECTIVE COVERS TO EXPOSED OIL PASSAGES AND
COMPONENTS IMMEDIATELY AFTER REMOVAL.

CAUTION:

WHENEVER ANY PART OF THE PROPELLER ASSEMBLY IS DISMANTLED,


ADJUSTED, REPAIRED OR REPLACED, DETAILED INVESTIGATION MUST BE MADE
ON COMPLETION TO MAKE SURE THAT DISTORTION, TOOLS, RAGS OR ANY
LOOSE ARTICLES OR FOREIGN MATTER, THAT COULD IMPEDE THE FREE
MOVEMENT AND SAFE OPERATION OF THE ASSEMBLY, ARE NOT PRESENT, AND
THAT THE SYSTEM AND INSTALLATIONS IN THE WORK AREA ARE CLEAN.

CAUTION:

WHENEVER ANY PART OF THE SYSTEM IS DISMANTLED, ADJUSTED, REPAIRED


OR REPLACED, THAT PART OF THE SYSTEM WILL, AFTER COMPLETION OF THE
WORK, BE TESTED TO ESTABLISH THE CORRECT OPERATION.

1. Removal/Installation of the Propeller Assembly


A.

Reason for the Job


- To remove and install the propeller assembly when it is
unserviceable or to get access to other components.
- To do the 61.004 MRB task (MRB Documents PV01 and PV01M),
"Restoration".
- To do the 61.10.00.03 MRB task (MRB Document PV02M), "Remove
Propeller Assembly for restoration".

B.

Equipment and Materials


ITEM

DESIGNATION

(1)

ITEM 20-00-04

Screwdriver for Torq-Set Screw

(2)

ITEM 20-15-01

Circuit Breakers Safety Clips and Tags

(3)

ITEM 61-10-01

Tri-Wing Screwdriver

(4)

ITEM 61-10-03

Propeller Transport Cart

(5)

ITEM 61-10-04

Control Alignment Tool

(6)

ITEM 61-10-05

Adapter Plate

(7)

ITEM 61-10-08

Torque Adapter

(8)

ITEM 61-10-12

Oil Transfer Tube Box

(9)

ITEM 61-10-13

Turning Fixture

(10) Standard Tool

Servicing Platform, 2 m (6.5 ft)

(11) Standard Tool

Warning Notices

Effectivity: See TOC

61-10-10

Pag. 402
May 15/13

CN-235 MAINTENANCE MANUAL


DESIGNATION

ITEM

(12) Standard Tool

Drip Tray

(13) Z-21.101

Lubricating Oil

(14) Z-21.220 or Z-21.209 Grease


(15) Z-23.117

Solvent

(16) Z-24.930

Lint-Free Cloth

(17) 110-318

Seal (Hamilton Sundstrand MM 61-10-00)

(18) 69272-25

Cotter Pin (Hamilton Sundstrand MM


61-10-00)

(19) 779247-7

Preformed Packing (Hamilton Sundstrand MM


61-10-00)

(20) 786124-1

Tee Seal (Hamilton Sundstrand MM


61-10-00)

(21) 794444-1

L Seal (Hamilton Sundstrand MM 61-10-00)

(22) AS3209-043

Packing

(23) M83248-1-115

Packing

(24) MS9245-27

Cotter Pin

(25) MS20995C20

Lockwire

Referenced Procedures:
- 07-13-10, P.
- 12-13-10, P.
- 20-21-00, P.
- 20-38-00, P.
- 30-61-00, P.
- 61-20-00, P.
- 61-20-19, P.
- 71-00-00, P.
- MM 61-10-00,
- MM 72-00-00

C.

Block 1
Block 1
Block 1
Block 1
Block 501
Block 301
Block 401
Block 501
P. Block 701

- Propeller Hoisting
- Propeller Gearbox Lubrication
- Standard Torques
- Sealing
- Propeller De-Icing System
- Propeller Controlling
- Magnetic Sensor
- Powerplant
- Propeller MM (Hamilton Sundstrand)
- Engine MM (General Electric)
- Flight Test After Maintenance Actions
Instructions Handbook

Procedure
(1) Job Set-Up
(a) Feather the propeller (Ref. 71-00-00, P. Block 501), if
applicable.

Effectivity: See TOC

61-10-10

Pag. 403
May 15/13

CN-235 MAINTENANCE MANUAL


(b) Open, safety and tags, with ITEM 20-15-01,the circuit
breaker:

Effectivity: See TOC

61-10-10

Pag. 404
May 15/13

CN-235 MAINTENANCE MANUAL


PANEL

SERVICE

BATTERY BUS 1

START

FIN
KA1

(c) Put the warning notices in the flight compartment telling


personnel not to start or ground run the relevant engine, or
operate the feathering system.
(d) Put the servicing platform in position.
(e) Put the drip tray under the propeller assembly.
(2) Removal (Fig. 401)
(a) Using the tri-wing screwdriver ITEM 61-10-01for tri-wing
screws, or the screwdriver for the torq-set screws ITEM
20-00-04, moved the screws (2), which attach the spinner (1)
to the back plate, from the contact surface.
(b) To prove the breakaway torque along all the thread of each
screw, and discard those that have less than 3,5 in.lb (4
cm.kg), or those that the threads are damaged.
(c) Remove the propeller spinner (1).
(d) Remove and discard the preformed packing (3) from the
propeller dome (4).
(e) Remove and discard the cotter pin (19). Remove the pin (18)
and the plug (9). Remove and discard the packing (10) from
the plug (9).
(f) Remove and discard the cotter pin (12) from the end of the
oil transfer tube (16) and the retainer (11).
(g) Rotate the oil transfer tube (16) and the retainer (11)
clockwise until the retainer tangs (13) on the retainer (11)
align with the slots in the pitch control valve (17). The
retainer (11) should spring back slightly.
(h) Remove the oil transfer tube (16) and the retainer (11),
from the pitch control valve (17).
(j) Remove and discard the packings or the seals (15).

Effectivity: See TOC

61-10-10

Pag. 405
May 15/13

CN-235 MAINTENANCE MANUAL


Propeller Assembly

CM1.61.10.10.4AO.01.00-01

Fig. 401 Propeller Assembly (Sheet 1 of 2)

Effectivity: See TOC

61-10-10

Pag. 406
May 15/13

CN-235 MAINTENANCE MANUAL

CM1.61.10.10.4AO.02.00-00

Fig. 401 Propeller Assembly (Sheet 2 of 2)

Effectivity: See TOC

61-10-10

Pag. 407
May 15/13

CN-235 MAINTENANCE MANUAL


(k) Put the oil transfer tube (16) and the retainer (11) in the
oil transfer tube box ITEM 61-10-12.
(l) Rotate the propeller until the relief valve (20) is
positioned upward.
(m) Remove the relief valve (20) and the seal (21). Discard the
seal (21).
(n) Engage the turning fixture ITEM 61-10-13 to the pitch
control valve slots (17).
(p) To prevent the blades locking, turn the pitch change valve
(17) counterclockwise while turning the blades by hand to
full reverse position.
(q) Remove the turning fixture ITEM 61-10-13.
(r) Reinstall the relief valve (20) and a new seal 110-318 (21).
Tighten by hand until the seal (21) is compresses.
(s) Install the propeller sling adapter and the sling
(Ref. 07-13-10, P. Block 1), and attach the hoist of the
lifter to the aft ring of the sling adapter.
(t) Remove the hexagon nuts (5) which attach the propeller to
the gearbox flange (6), using the torque adapter ITEM
61-10-08. Discard the hexagon nuts, that have a torque less
than 24 in.lb (27,5 cm.kg).
(u) Carefully separate the propeller assembly forward, until the
propeller hub is out of the dowels (7) on the gearbox flange
(6).
CAUTION:

MAKE SURE THAT THE WORK AREA IS FREE OF


OBSTRUCTIONS WHEN REMOVING THE PROPELLER FROM THE
GEARCASE. USE SLOW MOVEMENTS TO KEEP THE
PROPELLERS AND BLADES ON A STABLE PLANE.

(v) Carefully lower the propeller and guide hub onto the adapter
plate ITEM 61-10-05, of the propeller transport cart ITEM
61-10-03.
(w) Safety the propeller to the adapter plate ITEM 61-10-05with
four hexagon nuts (5), and tighten securely to the standard
torque value (Ref.20-21-00, P. Block 1).
(x) Remove the sling adapter and the sling
(Ref. 07-13-10, P. Block 1).

Effectivity: See TOC

61-10-10

Pag. 408
May 15/13

CN-235 MAINTENANCE MANUAL


(y) Remove and discard the packing (8).
(z) Reinstall the plug (9) in the pitch control valve (17) with
the pin (18), and temporarily hold them with lockwire
through the cotter pin hole.
(aa) Put suitable protective coverings over the exposed gearbox
shaft and the propeller hub openings.
(3) Preparation for Installation (Fig. 401)
NOTE:

The propeller blades must be in the full reverse position


before you start the installation procedure. This will
make sure that the tail shaft of the pitch change yoke is
retracted into the hub, for protection from damage.

NOTE:

To see if a propeller balancing is needed, and its


procedure, refer to the Propeller Maintenance Manual
(Ref. MM 61-10-00, P. Block 701), of Hamilton Sundstrand.

(a) Remove the protective covering from the gearbox shaft and
the propeller hub.
(b) Make sure that the gearbox axis and flange (6) and the
propeller mating surfaces are clear and free from burrs and
corrosion.
(c)
WARNING:

BE CAREFUL WHEN YOU USE MATERIAL Z-23.117. OBEY


THE MATERIAL MANUFACTURER'S INSTRUCTIONS

Clean the surfaces with a lint-free cloth Z-24.930,


impregnated with solvent Z-23.117, and let air dry for a
minimum of two minutes.
(d)
WARNING:

BE CAREFUL WHEN YOU USE MATERIAL Z-21.101. OBEY


THE MATERIAL MANUFACTURER'S INSTRUCTIONS

Apply a coat of lubrication oil Z-21.101 to the new packing


AS3209-043(8).

Effectivity: See TOC

61-10-10

Pag. 409
May 15/13

CN-235 MAINTENANCE MANUAL


(e) Install the new packing AS3209-043(8) into the gearbox
flange (6).
CAUTION:

MAKE SURE THAT THERE IS NOT LUBRICATING OIL ON


THE GEAR CASE OR HUB MOUNTING FLANGES. OTHERWISE,
RUB IT OFF WITH A CLEAN LINT-FREE CLOTH.

(f) Inspect the oil transfer tube (16) housing in the gearbox
shaft for damage and corrosion. If any found, refer to the
Engine Maintenance Manual (Ref. MM 72-00-00), of General
Electric.
(g) Make sure that the oil transfer tube (16) housing is free
from obstruction. If necessary, clean with a lint-free
clothZ-24.930.
(4) Installation (Fig. 401)
(a) Install the propeller sling adapter and the sling
(Ref. 07-13-10, P. Block 1), and attach the hoist of the
lifter to the aft ring of the sling adapter.
(b) Remove the hexagon nuts that attach the propeller to the
adapter plate ITEM 61-10-05, on propeller transport cart
ITEM 61-10-03.
(c) Carefully remove the propeller from the propeller transport
cart ITEM 61-10-03, and use the hand to keep the propeller
in a stable position in a vertical plane.
(d)
WARNING:

BE CAREFUL WHEN YOU USE MATERIAL Z-23.117. OBEY


THE MATERIAL MANUFACTURER'S INSTRUCTIONS.

Clean the contact surfaces, the bolts and the hexagon nuts
threads with a lint-free cloth Z-24.930, impregnated with
solvent Z-23.117, and let air dry for a minimum of two
minutes.
(e) Hoist the propeller carefully until the hub is in line with
the gearbox flange (6).
(f) Make sure that the packing (8) is installed.
(g) Align the dowel locating holes in the hub with the dowels
(7) on the flange (6), and introduce the propeller carefully
until the dowels (7) in the flange (6) engage with the holes
in the propeller hub.

Effectivity: See TOC

61-10-10

Pag. 410
May 15/13

CN-235 MAINTENANCE MANUAL


(h)
WARNING:

BE CAREFUL WHEN YOU USE MATERIAL Z-21.209 or


Z-21.220. OBEY THE MATERIAL MANUFACTURER'S
INSTRUCTIONS.

Lightly apply a thin coat of greaseZ-21.220 or Z-21.209 to


the threads of the bolts and the hexagon nuts (5), and to
the faces on the hexagon nuts (5) that touch the gearbox
flange (6) (Ref.20-38-00, P. Block 1).
(j) Install the hexagon nuts (5) on the bolts.
(k) Tighten the hexagon nuts (5), with a torque between 135 to
140 lb.ft (18,7 to 19,3 m.kg), using the torque adapter ITEM
61-10-08, refer to the Propeller Maintenance Manual (Ref. MM
61-10-00, P. Block 701) of Hamilton Sundstrand.
CAUTION:

MAKE SURE THAT THE TORQUE IS WITHIN THE SPECIFIED


LIMITS TO ASSURE THE PROPER ASSEMBLY OF THE
RETAINING NUTS.

(l) Remove the propeller sling adapter and the sling


(Ref. 07-13-10, P. Block 1).
(m) Adjust the magnetic sensor (Ref. 61-20-19, P. Block 401).
(n) Remove the temporary lockwire and remove the pin (18) and
the plug (9), from the pitch change valve (17).
(p) Insert the control alignment tool ITEM 61-10-04, to engage
the spline axis in the axis of the pitch control valve (17).
CAUTION:

TO PREVENT DAMAGE TO THE PITCH CONTROL VALVE, DO


NOT APPLY MORE THEN 25 IN.LB (28,8 CM.KG) OF
TORQUE TO THE CONTROL ALIGNMENT TOOL.

(q) Rotate the control alignment tool ITEM 61-10-04clockwise,


to confirm that the control valve (17), is against feather
stop position.
(r) Remove the control alignment tool ITEM 61-10-04.
(s) Engage the turning fixtureITEM 61-10-13, in the pitch
control valve slots (17). Simultaneously, turn the turning
fixture clockwise as the blades are turned by hand until the
full feather stop position.

Effectivity: See TOC

61-10-10

Pag. 411
May 15/13

CN-235 MAINTENANCE MANUAL


(t) Remove the turning fixture ITEM 61-10-13.
(u)
WARNING:

BE CAREFUL WHEN YOU USE MATERIAL Z-21.101. OBEY


THE MATERIAL MANUFACTURER'S INSTRUCTIONS

Remove the transfer tube (16) from the oil transfer tube
box, and coat the external surface of the oil transfer tube
(16) and the retainer (11) with the lubicating oil Z-21.101
(Ref.20-38-00, P. Block 1).
(v)
WARNING:

BE CAREFUL WHEN YOU USE MATERIAL Z-21.101. OBEY


THE MATERIAL MANUFACTURER'S INSTRUCTIONS

Lubricate the news Tee seals 786124-1or the news L seals


794444-1(15), with the lubricating oil Z-21.101, and
install each seal (15) with its backup ring in the oil
transfer tube (16), (Ref. MM 61-10-00, P. Block 701). Backup
rings must be installed in the outboard of each seal.
(w) Rotate the retainer (11) until stops with the oil transfer
tube (16). The retainer tangs (13) will be aligned with the
drive pins (14) of the oil transfer tube (16).
(x) Carefully insert the oil transfer tube (16) and retainer
(11), until the drive pins (14) are near from the top of the
pitch control valve slots (17).
(y) Slowly rotate the oil transfer tube (16) and the retainer
(11) clockwise, until the drive pins (14) are aligned and
can be introduced in the pitch control valve slots (17).
(z) If the pins (14) can not be introduced until the bottom of
the pitch control valve slots (17), remove the oil transfer
tube (16) until let it free from the pitch control valve
slots (17). Rotate the tube clockwise 90, and repeat the
operation of paragraph 1.C.(4).(x), until the tube is
installed completely.
(aa) Push the retainer (11) to engage the locking tangs (13) in
the pitch control valve slots (17) and rotate the retainer
90 to 120 to align the cotter pin holes in the retainer
and transfer tube.
(ab) Install the new cotter pin MS9245-27(12) and bend the
tangs.

Effectivity: See TOC

61-10-10

Pag. 412
May 15/13

CN-235 MAINTENANCE MANUAL


(ac)
WARNING:

BE CAREFUL WHEN YOU USE MATERIAL Z-21.101. OBEY


THE MATERIAL MANUFACTURER'S INSTRUCTIONS

Coat the new packing M83248-1-115(10) and the plug (9) with
the lubricating oil Z-21.101, and install the packing (10)
in the plug (9).
(ad) Insert the plug (9) into the pitch control valve housing
(17) and align the holes in the pitch control valve housing
(17) and plug (9).
(ae) Install the pin (18) and the new cotter pin 69272-25 (19).
(af) Rotate the propeller until the relief valve (20) is
positioned upward.
NOTE:

If the replaced propeller dome is pressurized,


remove the air filling valve from the relief valve
housing and fill the dome
(Ref. 61-20-00, P. Block 301).

(ag) Fill the dome if necessary (Ref. 61-20-00, P. Block 301).


(ah)
WARNING:

BE CAREFUL WHEN YOU USE MATERIAL Z-21.101. OBEY


THE MATERIAL MANUFACTURER'S INSTRUCTIONS

Coat the new preformed packing 779247-7(3) with lubricating


oilZ-21.101 and install in the recess on the dome
(Ref.20-38-00, P. Block 1).
(aj) Align the spinner (1) with the number 1 marked on the back
plate.
(ak)
WARNING:

BE CAREFUL WHEN YOU USE MATERIAL Z-21.209 or


Z-21.220. OBEY THE MATERIAL MANUFACTURER'S
INSTRUCTIONS.

Coat the threads and the bearing surface of the screws (2)
with grease Z-21.220 or Z-21.209 (Ref.20-38-00, P. Block 1).
Install the tri-wing screws (2) by using the
screwdriverITEM 61-10-01, or the torq-set screws (2) by
using the screwdriver for torq-set screwshead ITEM 20-00-04,
and tighten to a torque of 35 to 40 in.lb (40,5 to 46
cm.kg).

Effectivity: See TOC

61-10-10

Pag. 413
May 15/13

CN-235 MAINTENANCE MANUAL


(5) Test
(a) Remove the safety clips and tags ITEM 20-15-01,and close
the circuit breaker:
PANEL

SERVICE

BATTERY BUS 1

START

FIN
KA1

(b) Do the engine and propeller ground running test


(Ref. 71-00-00, P. Block 501).
(c) Do the propeller ice-protection system test
(Ref. 30-61-00, P. Block 501).
(d) Do a flight test type D after the close-up (Refer to Flight
Test After Maintenance Actions Instructions Handbook).
(6) Close-Up
(a) Fill the propeller gearbox with oil to the correct level
(Ref. 12-13-10, P. Block 1).
(b) Remove the drip tray and dispose of the drained oil in an
approved disposal area.
(c) Remove the servicing platform.
(d) Remove the warning notices from the flight compartment.
(e) Remove all tools and equipment from the work area. Make sure
that the work area is clean.
2. Removal/Installation of the Blade
A.

Reason for the Job


To remove and install the propeller blade when it is unserviceable or
to get access to other components.

Effectivity: See TOC

61-10-10

Pag. 414
May 15/13

CN-235 MAINTENANCE MANUAL


B.

Equipment and Materials


ITEM

DESIGNATION

(1)

ITEM 20-15-01

Circuit Breakers Safety Clips and Tags

(2)

Standard Tool

Servicing Platform, 2 m (6.5 ft)

(3)

Standard Tool

Warning Notices

(4)

Standard Tool

Drip Tray

Referenced Procedures:
- CMM 61-13-03, P. Block 301 - Propeller MM (Hamilton Sundstrand)
- CMM 61-13-03, P. Block 701 - Propeller MM (Hamilton Sundstrand)
- 12-13-10, P. Block 1
- Propeller Gearbox Lubrication
- 30-61-00, P. Block 501
- Propeller De-Icing System
- 71-00-00, P. Block 501
- Powerplant
C.

Procedure
(1) Job Set-Up
(a) Feather the propeller (Ref. 71-00-00, P. Block 501), if
applicable.
(b) Open, safety and tags, with ITEM 20-15-01,the circuit
breakers:
PANEL

SERVICE

BATTERY BUS 1

START

FIN
KA1

(c) Put the warning notices in the flight compartment telling


personnel not to start or ground run the relevant engine, or
operate the feathering system.
(d) Put the servicing platform in position.
(e) Put the drip tray under the propeller assembly.

Effectivity: See TOC

61-10-10

Pag. 415
May 15/13

CN-235 MAINTENANCE MANUAL


(2) Removal
(a) For the removal procedure of the blade, refer to the
Disassembly section of the CMM Propeller Maintenance Manual
(Ref. CMM 61-13-03, P. Block 301), of Hamilton Sundstrand.
(3) Installation
(a) For the installation procedure of the blade, refer to the
Propeller-Assembly section of the CMM Propeller Maintenance
Manual (Ref. CMM 61-13-03, P. Block 701), of Hamilton
Sundstrand.
(4) Test
(a) Remove the safety clips and tags ITEM 20-15-01,and close
the circuit breakers:
PANEL

SERVICE

BATTERY BUS 1

START

FIN
KA1

(b) Do the engine and propeller ground running test


(Ref. 71-00-00, P. Block 501).
(c) Do the propeller ice-protection system test
(Ref. 30-61-00, P. Block 501).
(5) Close-Up
(a) Fill the propeller gearbox with oil to the correct level
(Ref. 12-13-10, P. Block 1).
(b) Remove the drip tray and dispose of the drained oil in an
approved disposal area.
(c) Remove the servicing platform.
(d) Remove the warning notices from the flight compartment.
(e) Remove all tools and equipment from the work area. Make sure
that the work area is clean.

Effectivity: See TOC

61-10-10

Pag. 416
May 15/13

CN-235 MAINTENANCE MANUAL


PROPELLER CONTROLLING
DESCRIPTION/OPERATION

1. General
Propeller controlling includes the circuit and components that are needed
for the diverse operations of the propeller: Cruise, Beta, Flight Idle,
Reverse, Feather, Overspeed and Synchrophasing.
2. Component Location (Fig. 1)
ITEM

FIN

DESIGNATION

ZONE

ACCESS
PANEL

REFERENCE

1.

KD3

Synchrophasing
Control Unit

222

222CR

61-20-10

2.

KC50

FEATHER SYST Control


Unit

211

61-20-12

3.

KC41
(KC42)

Auxiliary Pump

413
(423)

413AL
(423AL)

61-20-13

4.

KC37
(KC38)

Overspeed Governor

413
(423)

413AR
(423AR)

61-20-14

5.

KC33
(KC34)

Pressure Switch

413
(423)

61-20-15

Control and Adapter


Assembly

413
(423)

413AL
413AR
(423AL)
(423AR)

61-20-16

Torque Motor

(423)

(423AL)
(423AR)

Timer

221
(222)

221CL
(222CR)

61-20-17

221

221CL

61-20-18

6.

KC39
(KC40)

Beta Switch

KC35
(KC36)

Feather Solenoid
Valve

KD6
7.

KC15
(KC16)

8.

KC43

Effectivity: See TOC

Autofeather Computer

61-20-00

CONFIG. 1
Pag. 1
Jun. 30/02

CN-235 MAINTENANCE MANUAL


Propeller Controlling - Component Location

CM1.61.20.00.0AO.01.01-04

Fig. 1 Propeller Controlling - Component Location (Sheet 1 of 2)

Effectivity: See TOC

61-20-00

CONFIG. 1
Pag. 2
Jun. 30/02

CN-235 MAINTENANCE MANUAL

CM1.61.20.00.0AO.02.01-01

Fig. 1 Propeller Controlling - Component Location (Sheet 2 of 2)

Effectivity: See TOC

61-20-00

CONFIG. 1
Pag. 3
Jun. 30/02

CN-235 MAINTENANCE MANUAL


ITEM

FIN

DESIGNATION

9.

KD5
(KD4)

Magnetic Sensor

10.

ZD118

SYSTEM TESTS Control


Unit

KC21
(KC22)

L (R) OVSP GOVERNOR


Switch

ZONE

ACCESS
PANEL

REFERENCE

412
(422)

412AL
(422AL)

61-20-19

211

24-30-12

221

221CL

24-58-14

** On A/C: SERIES 10
KC6
(KC8)

L (R) ABV FI BETA


BACK UP Switch

** On A/C: All
11.

ZD101

LH Relay Box

KC53

Relay

KC55

Relay

** On A/C: POST.SB.235-24-03/03M, S/N 063163, S/N 165178, S/N 180196


KB15

Relay

** On A/C: All
12.

ZD102

RH Relay Box

KC52

Relay

KC54

Relay

222

222CR

24-58-14

** On A/C: POST.SB.235-24-03/03M, S/N 063163, S/N 165178, S/N 180196


KB16

Relay

** On A/C: All
13.

14.

PC13

BATTERY BUS 1
C/B Panel

KC5

PROP FTR Circuit


Breaker

KC1

PROP BETA Circuit


Breaker

KC7

PROP AUTO FTR


Circuit Breaker

PC12
KC2

Effectivity: See TOC

BATTERY BUS 2
C/B Panel

211

24-50-03

211

24-50-03

PROP BETA Circuit


Breaker

61-20-00

CONFIG. 1
Pag. 4
Jun. 30/02

ITEM

15.

16.

17.

18.

FIN

CN-235 MAINTENANCE MANUAL


DESIGNATION
ZONE

KC4

PROP FTR Circuit


Breaker

PC9

L MISCELLANEOUS
C/B Panel

KD1

SYNC PROP Circuit


Breaker

ZD133

Control Quadrant

KD7

PROP SYNC OFF


Lighted Switch

ZD3

Left Instruments
Panel

ACCESS
PANEL

REFERENCE

222

24-58-15

213

76-10-11

24-00-10

211

KC19
(KC17)

BETA MODE Lighted


Indicator

ZD4

Right Instruments
Panel

212

KC18
(KC20)

BETA MODE Lighted


Indicator

24-00-10

221

221CL

61-20-11

** On A/C: POST.SB.235-61-04M
19.

KC80

Switcher

** On A/C: All
3. Description
The propeller controlling system includes the electrical/mechanical
components that are used to control the propeller through the various
modes required.
4. Component Description
A.

Synchrophasing Control Unit, KD3


The synchrophasing control unit KD3 is a microprocessor controlled
device which synchronizes the rotation and blade phase of the LH and
RH propeller.

Effectivity: See TOC

61-20-00

CONFIG. 1
Pag. 5
Jun. 30/02

CN-235 MAINTENANCE MANUAL


B.

FEATHER SYST Control Unit, KC50 (Fig. 2)


The FEATHER SYST control unit KC50 has the switches and indicators
for both automatic and manual feathering of the propeller.

C.

Auxiliary Pump, KC41 (KC42) (Fig. 3)


The auxiliary pump KC41 (KC42) assembly consists of a hydraulic gear
pump (1) and an electric motor (2) coupled together with an internal
spline coupling.
The hydraulic pump is self priming and has an internal pressure
relief valve (7) and internal check valve (6).
The electric motor is a 28VDC motor, that is designed for
intermittent duty.
The pump draws hydraulic fluid from the PGB sump through the inlet
port (3). The hydraulic fluid is filtered by a filter screen (5)
before it gets to the pump gears. The relief valve (7) limits the
output pressure from 690 psi to 750 psi. The hydraulic fluid goes to
the outlet port (4). The duty cycle is 30 seconds ON - 10 minutes
OFF.

D.

Overspeed Governor, KC37 (KC38) (Fig. 4)


The overspeed governor KC37 (KC38) consists of flyweights acting
against a spring through a governor valve. It works as a safeguard
against the propeller overspeed when the Np exceeds 103%.
The overspeed governor KC37 (KC38) has a test solenoid valve in a
bypass line. When the test solenoid valve is energized, an action
overspeed is simulated, increasing the pitch and decreasing the Np.

E.

Pressure Switch, KC33 (KC34)


A P3 pressure switch KC33 (KC34) installed on the engine provides a
means of instantly sensing a failed engine and, through the
autofeather computer KC43, feathers the propeller of the failed
engine.

** On A/C: BW02, SA01, SA02


The pressure switch KC33 (KC34) operates when increasing pressure is
at 120 psi 5 psi and then when decreasing pressure is by 100 psi.
** On A/C: All except BW02, SA01, SA02
The pressure switch KC33 (KC34) operates when increasing pressure is
at 100 psi 5 psi and then when decreasing pressure is by 80 psi.

Effectivity: See TOC

61-20-00

CONFIG. 1
Pag. 6
Jun. 30/02

CN-235 MAINTENANCE MANUAL


FEATHER SYST Control Unit, KC50

CM1.61.20.00.0BO.00.01-04

Fig. 2 FEATHER SYST Control Unit, KC50

Effectivity: See TOC

61-20-00

CONFIG. 1
Pag. 7
Jun. 30/02

CN-235 MAINTENANCE MANUAL


Auxiliary Pump, KC41 (KC42)

CM1.61.20.00.0CO.00.01-00

Fig. 3 Auxiliary Pump, KC41 (KC42)

Effectivity: See TOC

61-20-00

CONFIG. 1
Pag. 8
Jun. 30/02

CN-235 MAINTENANCE MANUAL


Overspeed Governor

CM1.61.20.00.0DO.00.01-00

Fig. 4 Overspeed Governor

Effectivity: See TOC

61-20-00

CONFIG. 1
Pag. 9
Jun. 30/02

CN-235 MAINTENANCE MANUAL


** On A/C: All
Electrically, pin B is common, B-A normally made and C-B made by
increasing pressure.
F.

Control and Adapter Assembly (Fig. 5)


The propeller control is attached to the aft side of the propeller
gear case.
The propeller control and adapter consist of the propeller control
and the necessary means to install the propeller control. These
consist of the adapter housing, V-band coupling, transfer tubes, and
packings.
The propeller control is a modularized two-control lever unit which
provides basic speed set, beta scheduling, reversing, and feathering
capabilities.
The beta switch KC39 (KC40) is part of the propeller control and is
activated by the servo piston. It closes when the blade angle is
lower than that of the flight idle, thus causing the BETA MODE
lighted indicators, KC19 (KC17) and KC18 (KC20) come on.
The mechanical feather valve and the feather solenoid valve KC35
(KC36) are part of the propeller control. Each one of these valves is
sufficient to feather the propeller and they are actuated by the CL
in a redundant form.
The torque motor KD6 is part of the right propeller controller. The
torque motor is controlled by the synchrophasing control unit KD3. It
varies the speeder spring force.

G.

Autofeather Computer, KC43


The autofeather computer, KC43 controls the inputs and gives an
output to feather the propeller when inputs are not within set
parameters.

** On A/C: POST.SB.235-61-04M
G.

Autofeather Computer, KC43


The autofeather computer KC43 is a microprocessor capable for
detecting immediately the failure of one of two enginesduring
takeoff or approach and landing, and in that case, for autofeathering
the propeller of the engine that fails. The autofeather computer KC43
receives and controls the inputs, depending on the operation being
done, and gives an output to feather the propeller when the inputs
are not within set parameters.

Effectivity: See TOC

61-20-00

CONFIG. 1
Pag. 10
Jun. 30/02

CN-235 MAINTENANCE MANUAL


Control and Adapter Assembly

CM1.61.20.00.0EO.00.01-00

Fig. 5 Control and Adapter Assembly

Effectivity: See TOC

61-20-00

CONFIG. 1
Pag. 11
Jun. 30/02

CN-235 MAINTENANCE MANUAL


** On A/C: All
H.

Timer, KC15 (KC16)


The timer KC15 (KC16) receives an input and delays the output for a
measured period of time.

J.

Magnetic Sensor, KD5 (KD4)


The magnetic sensor KD5 (KD4) senses the rotation of the propeller
and sends this information to the synchrophasing control unit KD3.

K.

SYSTEM TESTS Control Unit, ZD118


The SYSTEM TESTS control unit ZD118 has two L (R) OVSP GOVERNOR
switches KC21 (KC22) to test the overspeed governor, KC37 (KC38).
When the switch is activated, a test solenoid valve in overspeed
governor KC37 (KC38) is opened, simulating the action of the
overspeed governor, KC37 (KC38).

** On A/C: SERIES 10
The SYSTEM TESTS test control unit ZD118 has two L (R) ABV FI BETA
BACKUP switches, KC6 (KC8), to test the back-up system.
** On A/C: All
L.

Control Quadrant, ZD133


There is a PROP SYNC OFF lighted switch KD7 in the control quadrant
ZD133 that controls the synchrophasing system.

** On A/C: POST.SB.235-61-04M
M.

Switcher, KC80
The switcher KC80 decides, through the position of the PLs, the
signals to be introduced in the autofeather computer, KC43.
Therefore, at high power (takeoff), the autofeather computer, KC43,
receives the signals P 3 (stage sixth of each engine compressor) and
T Q (engine torque). At reduced power (approach and landing), the
autofeather computer, KC43, receives the N gen (speed of generator)
and N G (speed of gas generator) signals.

Effectivity: See TOC

61-20-00

CONFIG. 1
Pag. 12
Jun. 30/02

CN-235 MAINTENANCE MANUAL


** On A/C: All
5. Operation (Fig. 6, Fig. 7, Fig. 7A, Fig. 7B, Fig. 7C, Fig. 7D, Fig. 7E,
Fig. 8, Fig. 8A, Fig. 8B, Fig. 9, Fig. 10 and Fig. 11)
A.

General
Operation of the system is best explained by describing the operation
of the Control and Adapter in its various modes. The control and
adapter is a modularized two-control lever unit which provides basic
speed set, beta scheduling reversing, and feathering capabilities. It
also has a speed bias torque motor for propeller synchrophasing at
the RH engine and a cover and spring at the LH engine. All control
linkage is within the main control housing.
Control supply oil is directed to the speed sensitive governor, the
reversing valve, metering orifices to the beta valve, the increased
pitch side of the servo piston, and into the propeller oil transfer
tube.
Hydraulic actuation of the servo piston axially loads the ballscrew,
which converts this axial load into rotational output. This
rotational output from the control is sent to the propeller by the
oil transfer tube, which is splined to the ballscrew and attached to
the propeller acme screw and pitch change valve.
The ballscrew, oil transfer tube, and acme screw and pitch change
valve all rotate with the propeller. Any rotary motion provided by
the servo piston and ballscrew is relative to the propeller rotation.
Supply oil is maintained at all times, during operation, on the
increase pitch side of the servo piston. This is a safeguard; if
there is loss of hydraulic pressure to the opposite side of the servo
piston, unobstructed flow of supply oil drives the ballscrew to
feather the propeller. Hydraulic pressure balances forces on the
servo piston by being introduced to the opposite side of the servo
piston. The servo piston is therefore actuated by varying this
pressure.

Effectivity: See TOC

61-20-00

CONFIG. 1
Pag. 13
Jun. 30/02

CN-235 MAINTENANCE MANUAL


Propeller Controlling - Operation

CM1.61.20.00.0FO.00.01-00

Fig. 6 Propeller Controlling - Operation

Effectivity: See TOC

61-20-00

CONFIG. 1
Pag. 14
Jun. 30/02

CN-235 MAINTENANCE MANUAL


B.

Cruise
During cruise operation, supply oil is metered by the speed sensitive
governor. The governor is driven through gears by propeller rotation.
The governor is positioned by flyweights acting against a speeder
spring. The speeder spring force is varied by linkage attached to the
condition lever (speed set cam) and by the torque motor KD6 which is
controlled by the synchrophasing control unit, KD3. The spring force
is also adjusted for temperature changes through a compensation disk
installed on the spring seat.
Metered oil from the governor passes through the least selector
valve, which serves as a hydraulic discriminator between the speed
sensitive governor and the overspeed governor KC37 (KC38). The least
selector valve will remain shifted unless an overspeed exists, and
route oil from the governor to the reversing valve. During operation
other than reverse handling, the reversing valve will direct oil to
the servo piston (metered side) and beta valve.
When propeller is in a governing mode, the oil which is routed to the
beta valve has no outlet. Therefore, oil metered by the governor
directly positions the servo piston driving the ballscrew to position
the pitch change valve in the propeller.
While governing, an increase in propeller RPM throws the governor
flyweights outward shifting the governor toward closing the outlet
window and allowing servo piston pressure to bleed to lubrication
pressure. This drops oil pressure on the metered side of the servo
piston, allowing supply pressure to actuate the piston driving the
ballscrew and acme screw counterclockwise to increase blade angle. As
the blade angle increases, the RPM decreases and the flyweights
reposition the governor to on-speed.
A decrease in RPM collapses the flyweights opening the governor
outlet window. This increases the metered pressure on the servo
piston driving the ballscrew clockwise to decrease blade angle. As
the blade angle decreases, the RPM increases and the flyweights
reposition the governor to on-speed.
Synchrophasing is accomplished in the governing mode. A signal from
the magnetic sensor KD5 from the LH propeller is used as a master.
This signal is compared to the RH (slave) propeller signal by the
synchrophasing control unit, KD3. The RPM and phase relationship is
determined, and the corrective signal is input to the RH propeller
speed bias torque motor KD6. The torque motor KD6 adjusts the
governor speeder spring force and therefore the propeller RPM and
phase relationship.

Effectivity: See TOC

61-20-00

CONFIG. 1
Pag. 15
Jun. 30/02

CN-235 MAINTENANCE MANUAL


C.

Beta Mode
For beta mode operation, an underspeed condition must exist on the
governor, i.e., flyweights collapsed directing flow through the least
selector and reversing valves to the servo piston and beta valve.
In this mode the power lever, through the beta schedule cam and
linkage, positions the inner sleeve of the beta valve to schedule
blade angle. The beta valve inner sleeve is held against the input
linkage by hydraulic pressure. The beta follow-up arm attached to the
servo piston contacts the outer sleeve of the beta valve positioning
it against hydraulic pressure to provide a blade angle feedback. The
positioning of the inner and outer segments of the beta valve meters
the oil to the servo piston by dumping oil to drain pressure. There
is a scheduled blade angle for all power lever positions.
Moving the power lever to increase blade angle (toward takeoff
position) positions the inner valve to dump oil to drain. This drops
pressure to the metered side of the servo piston, driving the
ballscrew counterclockwise to increase blade angle. As the servo
piston moves, the follow-up arm allows the hydraulic pressure to
position the outer sleeve and null the beta valve at the scheduled
blade angle.
Moving the power lever to decrease blade angle (toward reverse)
positions the inner valve to close. This allows pressure to build on
the metered side of the servo piston, driving the ballscrew clockwise
to decrease blade angle. As the servo piston actuates, the follow-up
arm on the piston positions the outer beta sleeve to null the valve
at the scheduled blade angle.
The beta switch, KC39 (KC40) is activated by the servo piston, closes
when the blade angle is lower than that of the flight idle, thus
causing the BETA MODE lighted indicators, KC19 (KC17) and KC18
(KC20), come on.

D.

Flight Idle Backup (Beta Back-Up)


The system provides protection against pitch decrease to low blade
angles. To provide this protection, an electrical signal from the
beta switch KC39 (KC40) (closed at beta angles below flight idle) in
the control is routed through a power lever switch (closed above
flight idle) to the feather solenoid valve KC35 (KC36).
If the blade angle goes below the flight idle blade angle with the
power lever flight idle, the feather solenoid valve, KC35 (KC36) is
activated until the blade angle is above flight idle.

Effectivity: See TOC

61-20-00

CONFIG. 1
Pag. 16
Jun. 30/02

CN-235 MAINTENANCE MANUAL


This condition will be registered in the Flight Data Recorder. At
the same time the BETA MODE lighted indicators, KC19 (KC17) and KC18
(KC20) come on.
When the blade angle goes above flight idle the beta switch, KC39
(KC40), opens and BETA MODE lighted indicators, KC19 (KC17) and KC18
(KC20) go off. If the blade angle again goes below flight idle, the
process is repeated and the blade angle will cycle around the
scheduled flight idle blade angle.
E.

Reverse
As the power lever is moved toward reverse, the beta schedule cam
positions linkage to shift the reversing valve. As the valve shifts,
the governor and overspeed governor KC37 (KC38) oil sources to the
servo piston are closed. This prevents the governors from providing
oil to increase blade angle during reverse handling as might occur in
a rapid transient.
Supply oil is metered through the valve to the beta valve and servo
piston, simulating the governor underspeed condition. Blade angle is
now directly controlled by the power lever without interference by
the governors.

F.

Feather
To feather the propeller, the condition lever is pulled to the
feather position. This mechanically opens, through condition lever
linkage, the feather valve which dumps the metered oil to the servo
piston to drain pressure. An feather solenoid valve, KC35 (KC36) is
also activated, as a backup to insure feather operation, dumping the
metered oil to the servo piston drain. This allows supply oil to
actuate the servo piston driving the ballscrew counterclockwise
(increase pitch).
The pitch change valve is positioned to saturate the increase pitch
side of the yoke piston with oil (supply pressure) while draining the
decreased pitch side. The auxiliary motor and pump KC41 (KC42) can be
activated manually or when the engine auto-feather system actuates
providing additional supply oil into the system.
The propeller is unfeathered by moving the condition lever out of
feather. This closes the mechanical and electrical feather valves
pressurizing the metered side of the servo piston, as the governor is
in an underspeed condition. This drives the ballscrew clockwise
(decrease pitch) and the propeller returns to governing or beta
operating mode.

Effectivity: See TOC

61-20-00

CONFIG. 1
Pag. 17
Jun. 30/02

CN-235 MAINTENANCE MANUAL


In the event of an engine failure or a drop in P 3 pressure beyond
set parameters, the propeller of the failed engine is automatically
feathered by the autofeather computer, KC43. A P 3 pressure switch
KC33 (KC34) sends an input signal to the autofeather computer, KC43
which in turn sends output signals to feather the propeller. When the
P3 pressure of a failed engine returns to a value within the set
parameters, the signal from the pressure switch KC33 (KC34) to the
autofeather computer KC43 is inhibited and the propeller returns to
the unfeathered position.
An autofeather test can be done from the FEATHER SYST control unit
KC50. The CMPTR switch, KC24, is used to test the autofeather
computer KC43 and the FTR TEST switch, KC23, is used to simulate
necessary conditions to feather the propeller.
** On A/C: POST.SB.235-61-04M
F.

Feather
(1) Automatic Feather-Operation and Interface
During normal operation of the system, five separate engine
parameters are input to the autofeather computer. These are:
- The power lever settings, enabled by the switches S6 (RH and
LH) of the Power and Condition Control System
(Ref.76-10-00, P. Block 1). These switches are connected in
series to give a discrete when both power lever settings are
above the threshold value.
- The LH and RH engine P3 pressure discretes, enabled by the
pressure switches KC33 (RH Propeller) and KC34 (LH Propeller).
- The LH engine and RH engine Torque signals, a 5V DC analogue
signal enabled by the engine torque value. These signals are
received from the Engine Electrical Control System, KB5 (LH
Engine) and KB6 (RH Engine) (Ref.73-20-00, P. Block 1).
These signals are sent through the logic circuits of the
switcher, KC80 to the CPU of the autofeather computer, KC43.
The switcher KC80, also receives a RH Engine and LH Engine RPM
Hi-Lo signal. These signals are used in the circuits when the
engines are set to a low power settings to allow autofeather
under these conditions. The switching determines which of the
inputs, Torque or RPM, are to be used. This depends on the
setting of the power levers. If they are set above the threshold,
the torque input is used. If set below the threshold, the RPM
input is used.

Effectivity: See TOC

61-20-00

CONFIG. 1
Pag. 18
Jun. 30/02

CN-235 MAINTENANCE MANUAL


When an engine failure occurs the failure is detected by a change
of the inputs to the system. The autofeather computer KC43
generates an 28V DC Autofeather signal which make relay KC52 (RH
engine fail) or KC53 (LH engine fail). The 28V DC is now
connected through the relay to:
- the applicable feather solenoid, KC35 or KC36
- the applicable timer, KC15 or KC16
The timer, KC15 (KC16), is energized for a set time, then it
de-energizes, and connects the 28V DC to the applicable relay CD4
or CD5 which energizes. This connects the BAT BUS 1 output to the
applicable auxiliary pump KC41 (KC42). The feather solenoid KC35
(KC36) and auxiliary pump KC41 (KC42)feather the propeller of the
engine with the fault.
(2) Manual Feather-Operation and Interface
With the aircraft in the air and the power levers set to the FLT
IDLE position, the microswitches (S5, LH and RH) are made and 28V
DC is sent through the WOW switch to the BETA lights in the
Propeller Indicating circuits(Ref.61-40-00, P. Block 1) and the
lights come on. When on the ground, this action is inhibited by
the WOW switch being opened.
In normal operation, power for the system is supplied from:
- Battery Bus 1, through the circuit breaker KC5 (LH System)
- Battery Bus 2, through the circuit breaker KC4 (RH System)
The power supply is connected to the feather micro-switch in the
control quadrant and the Manual Autofeather switch (LH and RH)
input.
The control quadrant micro-switch is closed when the condition
lever is set between the START and the OFF position.
When set to this position, the 28V DC is sent through the switch
to the coil of the relay KC55 (LH) or KC54 (RH) and the relay
energizes. This connects the 28V DC to the applicable feather
solenoid KC35 or KC36 through the relaxed contacts of the relay
KC53 or KC52. The feather solenoid KC35 (KC36) feathers the
applicable engine.

Effectivity: See TOC

61-20-00

CONFIG. 1
Pag. 19
Jun. 30/02

CN-235 MAINTENANCE MANUAL


Automatic Feather - Operation and Interfaces

CM1.61.20.00.0GO.01.01-03

Fig. 7 Automatic Feather - Operation and Interfaces (Sheet 1 of 2)

Effectivity: PRE.SB.235-24-03/03M, SERIES 10

61-20-00

CONFIG. 1
Pag. 20
Jun. 30/02

CN-235 MAINTENANCE MANUAL

CM1.61.20.00.0GO.02.01-02

Fig. 7 Automatic Feather - Operation and Interfaces (Sheet 2 of 2)

Effectivity: PRE.SB.235-24-03/03M, SERIES 10

61-20-00

CONFIG. 1
Pag. 21
Jun. 30/02

CN-235 MAINTENANCE MANUAL

CM1.61.20.00.0GA.01.01-03

Automatic Feather - Operation and Interfaces


Fig. 7A Automatic Feather - Operation and Interfaces (Sheet 1 of 2)

Effectivity: PRE.SB.235-73-01/01M,POST.SB.235-24-03/03M,
TK01, TK02, TK03, PRE.SB.235-61-04M

61-20-00

CONFIG. 1
Pag. 22
Jun. 30/02

CN-235 MAINTENANCE MANUAL

CM1.61.20.00.0GA.02.01-02

Fig. 7A Automatic Feather - Operation and Interfaces (Sheet 2 of 2)

Effectivity: PRE.SB.235-73-01/01M,POST.SB.235-24-03/03M,
TK01, TK02, TK03, PRE.SB.235-61-04M

61-20-00

CONFIG. 1
Pag. 23
Jun. 30/02

CN-235 MAINTENANCE MANUAL

CM1.61.20.00.0GB.01.01-03

Automatic Feather - Operation and Interfaces


Fig. 7B Automatic Feather - Operation and Interfaces (Sheet 1 of 2)

Effectivity: TK04(01-04),
FR02(07-08) PRE.SB.235-61-04M

61-20-00

CONFIG. 1
Pag. 24
Jun. 30/02

CN-235 MAINTENANCE MANUAL

CM1.61.20.00.0GB.02.01-02

Fig. 7B Automatic Feather - Operation and Interfaces (Sheet 2 of 2)

Effectivity: TK04(01-04),
FR02(07-08) PRE.SB.235-61-04M

61-20-00

CONFIG. 1
Pag. 25
Jun. 30/02

CN-235 MAINTENANCE MANUAL

CM1.61.20.00.0GC.01.01-02

Automatic Feather - Operation and Interfaces


Fig. 7C Automatic Feather - Operation and Interfaces (Sheet 1 of 2)

Effectivity: POST.SB.235-73-01/01M, TK04(05-16)

61-20-00

CONFIG. 1
Pag. 26
Jun. 30/02

CN-235 MAINTENANCE MANUAL

CM1.61.20.00.0GC.02.01-01

Fig. 7C Automatic Feather - Operation and Interfaces (Sheet 2 of 2)

Effectivity: POST.SB.235-73-01/01M, TK04(05-16)

61-20-00

CONFIG. 1
Pag. 27
Jun. 30/02

CN-235 MAINTENANCE MANUAL

CM1.61.20.00.0GD.01.01-00

Automatic Feather-Operation and Interfaces


Fig. 7D Automatic Feather-Operation and Interfaces (Sheet 1 of 3)

Effectivity: POST.SB.235-24-03M
POST.SB.235-61-04M except FR02 (07-08)

61-20-00

CONFIG. 1
Pag. 28
Jun. 30/02

CN-235 MAINTENANCE MANUAL

CM1.61.20.00.0GD.02.01-00

Fig. 7D Automatic Feather-Operation and Interfaces (Sheet 2 of 3)

Effectivity: POST.SB.235-24-03M
POST.SB.235-61-04M except FR02 (07-08)

61-20-00

CONFIG. 1
Pag. 29
Jun. 30/02

CN-235 MAINTENANCE MANUAL

CM1.61.20.00.0GD.03.01-00

Fig. 7D Automatic Feather-Operation and Interfaces (Sheet 3 of 3)

Effectivity: POST.SB.235-24-03M
POST.SB.235-61-04M except FR02 (07-08)

61-20-00

CONFIG. 1
Pag. 30
Jun. 30/02

CN-235 MAINTENANCE MANUAL

CM1.61.20.00.0GE.01.01-00

Automatic Feather-Operation and Interfaces


Fig. 7E Automatic Feather-Operation and Interfaces (Sheet 1 of 3)

Effectivity: FR02 (07-08) POST.SB.235-61-04M

61-20-00

CONFIG. 1
Pag. 31
Jun. 30/02

CN-235 MAINTENANCE MANUAL

CM1.61.20.00.0GE.02.01-00

Fig. 7E Automatic Feather-Operation and Interfaces (Sheet 2 of 3)

Effectivity: FR02 (07-08) POST.SB.235-61-04M

61-20-00

CONFIG. 1
Pag. 32
Jun. 30/02

CN-235 MAINTENANCE MANUAL

CM1.61.20.00.0GE.03.01-00

Fig. 7E Automatic Feather-Operation and Interfaces (Sheet 3 of 3)

Effectivity: FR02 (07-08) POST.SB.235-61-04M

61-20-00

CONFIG. 1
Pag. 33
Jun. 30/02

CN-235 MAINTENANCE MANUAL


When the pilot sets the Manual Autofeather switch to LH or RH,
the 28V DC is sent to the relay KC64 (LH) or KC65 (RH) and the
relay energizes. This connects the 28V DC directly to the
applicable feather solenoid KC35 (LH) or KC36 (RH). The 28V DC is
also sent to the timer KC15 (LH) or KC16 (RH). This causes the
same actions to take place as in Autofeather and the auxiliary
pump KC41 (KC42) is energized. The two units feather the
applicable propeller.
(3) Propeller Autofeather-Test and warnings
When the system is set to OFF, the Unsafe T/O Config Warning
System gets a signal through the relaxed contacts of the relay
KC68 (Ref.31-52-00, P. Block 1)
When the system is set to ON, 28V DC is sent through the CONT
switch KC25 to the relay KC68 and the relay is energized. Power
is also sent to the switcher KC80 and then to the autofeather
computer KC43. Also the TO and APP lights of the ARM lighted
indicator, KC26, come on.
When the CMPTR Switch, KC24, is set and held in the TEST
position, a discrete signal is sent to the switcher KC80 to start
a self-test. An output is given to ARM lighted indicator, KC26,
and TO and APP lights come on.
The switch must be set to RESET to put the TO and APP lights out.
When the FTR TEST switch KC23 is set and held to L or R, an
autofeather situation is simulated and the applicable propeller
will be feathered.
When a fault occurs, a discrete is given to the Flight Warning
System (Ref.31-51-00, P. Block 1).
** On A/C: All
G.

Overspeed
The propeller overspeed governor KC37 (KC38) is an additional
safeguard to the propeller control system. During normal on-speed
operations, the overspeed governor KC37 (KC38) routes oil supply to
the least selector valve, keeping it shifted. If an overspeed occurs,
flyweights shift the overspeed governor, KC37 (KC38) closing its oil
supply to the least selector valve and opens the line to dump oil to
drain pressure.

Effectivity: See TOC

61-20-00

CONFIG. 1
Pag. 34
Jun. 30/02

CN-235 MAINTENANCE MANUAL


Manual Feather - Operation and Interfaces

CM1.61.20.00.0HO.00.01-00

Fig. 8 Manual Feather - Operation and Interfaces

Effectivity: PRE.SB.235-24-03/03M, SERIES 10

61-20-00

CONFIG. 1
Pag. 35
Jun. 30/02

CN-235 MAINTENANCE MANUAL

CM1.61.20.00.0HA.00.01-01

Manual Feather - Operation and Interfaces


Fig. 8A Manual Feather - Operation and Interfaces

Effectivity: POST.SB.235-24-03/03M
PRE.SB.235-73-01/01M, TK01, TK02, TK03

61-20-00

CONFIG. 1
Pag. 36
Jun. 30/02

CN-235 MAINTENANCE MANUAL

CM1.61.20.00.0HB.00.01-00

Manual Feather - Operation and Interfaces


Fig. 8B Manual Feather - Operation and Interfaces

Effectivity: POST.SB.235-73-01/01M
TK04, FR02 (07-08)

61-20-00

CONFIG. 1
Pag. 37
Jun. 30/02

CN-235 MAINTENANCE MANUAL


The least selector valve shifts, directing oil from the servo piston
metered side to the overspeed governor KC37 (KC38). This actuates the
servo piston, driving the ballscrew counterclockwise to increase
blade angle. As the blade angle increases, the propeller RPM will
decrease, shifting the overspeed governor KC37 (KC38) and therefore
the least selector valve. The propeller will now operate at the
normal governor setting.
H.

Synchrophaser
A solid state, digital microprocessor provides phase and speed error
information to bias the RH propeller thereby maintaining the desired
phase relationship between the LH and RH propellers.
The electrical interface between the synchrophasing control unit, KD3
and propeller control speed governor uses a speed bias torque motor
KD6 which provides a force bias on the governor flyweight system.
A magnetic sensor KD5 (KD4) produces signals (pulse train) which
provide propeller speed and phase information. A sensor is installed
on the LH propeller and a second one on the RH propeller. These pulse
trains are supplied as inputs to the synchrophasing control unit,
KD3, where they are conditioned, counted, and compared. The output is
used to command an increase or decrease of the RH propeller speed by
a signal to the torque motor, KD6.

6. Interfaces (Fig. 7, Fig. 7A, Fig. 7B, Fig. 7C, Fig. 7D, Fig. 7E, Fig. 8,
Fig. 8A, Fig. 8B, Fig. 9, Fig. 10 and Fig. 11)
The propeller controlling interfaces with the following systems or
subsystems:
- DC Generation System,
- Flight Data Recording System,
- Flight Warning System,
- Unsafe Take-Off Configuration Warning System,
- Instruments and Panel Lighting,
- Propeller Indicating,
- Engine Electrical Control System - Fuel
- Power and Condition Control,
- Engine Power Indicating System

Effectivity: See TOC

61-20-00

CONFIG. 1
Pag. 38
Jun. 30/02

CN-235 MAINTENANCE MANUAL


Overspeed Test - Operation and Interfaces

CM1.61.20.00.0JO.00.01-00

Fig. 9 Overspeed Test - Operation and Interfaces

Effectivity: See TOC

61-20-00

CONFIG. 1
Pag. 39
Jun. 30/02

CN-235 MAINTENANCE MANUAL


Synchrophaser System - Operation and Interfaces

CM1.61.20.00.0KO.00.01-00

Fig. 10 Synchrophaser System - Operation and Interfaces

Effectivity: See TOC

61-20-00

CONFIG. 1
Pag. 40
Jun. 30/02

CN-235 MAINTENANCE MANUAL


Flight Idle Safety System and beta Lights

CM1.61.20.00.0LO.00.01-00

Fig. 11 Flight Idle Safety System and beta Lights

Effectivity: See TOC

61-20-00

CONFIG. 1
Pag. 41
Jun. 30/02

CN-235 MAINTENANCE MANUAL

INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK

Effectivity: See TOC

61-20-00

CONFIG. 1
Pag. 42
Jun. 30/02

CN-235 MAINTENANCE MANUAL


PROPELLER CONTROLLING
TROUBLESHOOTING

1. General
This section contains troubleshooting procedures for the propeller pitch
change system.
A.
MAXIMUM Np ARE TOO LOW.

SUPPORT EQUIPMENT REQUIRED


-NIL

CHECK THE ADJUST OF CONDITION


CONTROL CABLE BETWEEN PROPELLER
CONTROL ADAPTER AND HMU.

ADJUST CONDITION CONTROL CABLE


(Ref. 76-10-00, P. Block 501)
YES

IS CABLE UNADJUSTED?
NO
READ TORQUE.
IS TORQUE HIGH?
(Ref. 76-10-00, P. Block 501)

YES

REMOVE TRANSFER TUBE AND


REPLACE DAMAGED PREFORMED
PACKINGS
(Ref. 61-10-10, P. Block 401)

NO
REPLACE PROPELLER CONTROL AND
ADAPTER
(Ref. 61-20-16, P. Block 401)

Effectivity: See TOC

61-20-00

Pag. 101
Jun. 01/99

CN-235 MAINTENANCE MANUAL


B.
Np FLUCTUATES, OR PITCH CHANGE
IS SLUGGISH IN OPERATION,
(Ref. 76-10-00, P. Block 501)

SUPPORT EQUIPMENT REQUIRED


- NIL

OBSERVE PROPELLER OIL PRESSURE


GAGE.

REFER TO PARA. E IN THIS


TROUBLESHOOTING.

IS OIL PRESSURE LOW?

YES

NO
FEATHER THE PROPELLER USING THE
AUXILIARY FEATHERING PUMP
(Ref. 61-20-00, P. Block 501)
IS PITCH CHANGE OPERATION
CORRECT?

YES

PROPELLER GEARBOX PRESSURE PUMP


IS DEFECTIVE. REMOVE POWERPLANT
(Ref. 71-00-00, P. Block 401)

NO
SUSPECT TRANSFER TUBE PREFORMED
PACKINGS. REMOVE TRANSFER TUBE
AND INSPECT FOR OBSTRUCTION
(Ref. 61-10-10, P. Block 401)

THE PROPELLER BLADES PITCH


CHANGE SYSTEM IS CORRECT.
YES

IS PITCH CHANGE OPERATION


CORRECT?
NO
1

Effectivity: See TOC

SEE NEXT PAGE

61-20-00

Pag. 102
Jun. 01/99

CN-235 MAINTENANCE MANUAL


1

FROM PREVIOUS PAGE

NO
REPLACE CONTROL AND ADAPTER
ASSEMBLY
(Ref. 61-20-16, P. Block 401)
IS PITCH CHANGE OPERATION
CORRECT?

THE PROPELLER BLADES PITCH


CHANGE SYSTEM IS CORRECT.
YES

NO
PISTON ACTUATOR IN PROPELLER
ASSEMBLY IS DEFECTIVE. REPLACE
PROPELLER
ASSEMBLY(Ref. 61-10-10
, P. Block 401)
C.
MAXIMUM Np IS 103%

SUPPORT EQUIPMENT REQUIRED:


- NIL

REPLACE PROPELLER CONTROL AND


ADAPTER
(Ref. 61-20-16, P. Block 401)
D.
RESULTS OF THE PROPELLER
OVERSPEED TEST ARE INCORRECT
(Ref. 71-00-00, P. Block 501)

SUPPORT EQUIPMENT REQUIRED:


- NIL

REPLACE OVERSPEED GOVERNOR


(Ref. 61-20-14, P. Block 401)

Effectivity: See TOC

61-20-00

Pag. 103
Jun. 01/99

CN-235 MAINTENANCE MANUAL


E.
PROPELLER OIL PRESSURE LOW.

SUPPORT EQUIPMENT REQUIRED:


- NIL

INSPECT THE FOLLOWING ELEMENTS


FOR LEAKAGE:
- PROPELLER DOME
- RELIEF VALVE
- CONTROL AND ADAPTER
- OVERSPEED GOVERNOR.

REPLACE LEAKING ELEMENT.

YES

IS THERE ANY LEAKAGE?


F.
BLADES REMAIN IN FIXED ANGLE.

SUPPORT EQUIPMENT REQUIRED:


- NIL

OBSERVE PROPELLER OIL PRESSURE


GAGE.

REFER TO PARA. E IN THIS


TROUBLESHOOTING.

YES

IS OIL PRESSURE LOW?


NO
REPLACE CONTROL AND ADAPTER
ASSEMBLY
(Ref. 61-20-16, P. Block 401)
IS PITCH CHANGE OPERATION
CORRECT?

THE PROPELLER BLADES PITCH


CHANGE SYSTEM IS CORRECT.
YES

NO
1

Effectivity: See TOC

SEE NEXT PAGE

61-20-00

Pag. 104
Jun. 01/99

CN-235 MAINTENANCE MANUAL


1

FROM PREVIOUS PAGE

NO
PISTON ACTUATOR IN PROPELLER
ASSEMBLY IS DEFECTIVE. REPLACE
PROPELLER
ASSEMBLY(Ref. 61-10-10
, P. Block 401)
G.
PROPELLERS ARE NOT
SYNCHRONIZED.

SUPPORT EQUIPMENT REQUIRED:


- NIL

CHECK MAGNETIC SENSOR CLEARANCE


(Ref. 61-20-19, P. Block 401)

YES

ADJUST MAGNETIC SENSOR


(Ref. 61-20-19, P. Block 401)

YES

REPLACE SYNCHROPHASING CONTROL


UNIT
(Ref. 61-20-10, P. Block 401)

IS ADJUST UNSATISFACTORY?
NO
TEMPORARILY INSTALL A
SERVICEABLE SYNCHROPHASING
CONTROL UNIT.
IS SYNCHROPHASING AVAILABLE?
NO
1

Effectivity: See TOC

SEE NEXT PAGE

61-20-00

Pag. 105
Jun. 01/99

CN-235 MAINTENANCE MANUAL


1

FROM PREVIOUS PAGE

NO
DISCONNECT CONNECTOR ZD133b
FROM CONTROL QUADRANT AND DO A
TEST FOR POWER SUPPLY AT
CONNECTOR PIN p.

YES

REPLACE OR REPAIR WIRING


BETWEEN CONTROL QUADRANT AND L
MISCELLANEOUS CIRCUIT BREAKER
PANEL, PC9.

IS POWER SUPPLY MISSING?


NO
DO A CONTINUITY TEST AT
CONNECTOR ZD133B BETWEEN PINS p
AND n, WITH SWITCH KD7 SET TO
ON.

REPAIR OR REPLACE CONTROL


QUADRANT
(Ref. 76-10-11, P. Block 401)
YES

ANY FAULT FOUND?


NO
SUSPECT TORQUE MOTOR IN CONTROL
AND ADAPTER IS DEFECTIVE.
REPLACE CONTROL AND ADAPTER
(Ref. 61-20-16, P. Block 401)

THE PROPELLER SYNCHROPHASER


SYSTEM IS CORRECT.
YES

IS SYSTEM SERVICEABLE?
NO
INSPECT DEFECTIVE WIRING AND
REPAIR OR REPLACE AS NECESSARY.

Effectivity: See TOC

61-20-00

Pag. 106
Jun. 01/99

CN-235 MAINTENANCE MANUAL


PROPELLER CONTROLLING
SERVICING
WARNING:

WHENEVER ANY PART OF THE SYSTEM IS DISMANTLED, ADJUSTED, REPAIRED


OR REPLACED, THAT PART OF THE SYSTEM WILL, AFTER COMPLETION OF THE
WORK, BE TESTED TO ESTABLISH THE CORRECT OPERATION.

WARNING:

MAKE SURE THAT RELEVANT ELECTRICAL CIRCUITS ARE ISOLATED.

WARNING:

BE CAREFUL WHEN YOU USE OILS AND GREASES.


OBEY THE MATERIAL MANUFACTURER'S INSTRUCTIONS AND THE LOCAL
REGULATIONS.
USE PROTECTIVE CLOTHING, GOGGLES AND GLOVES.
IF YOU GET OIL OR GREASE:
- ON YOUR SKIN, REMOVE IT WITH SOAP AND CLEAN WATER
- IN YOUR EYES OR IN YOUR MOUTH, FLUSH IT AWAY WITH CLEAN WATER.
GET MEDICAL AID.
IN GENERAL, OILS AND GREASES ARE POISONOUS AND SKIN IRRITANTS.

CAUTION:

SYNTHETIC OIL CAN CAUSE DAMAGE TO PAINTWORK AND CERTAIN TYPES OF


RUBBER. AVOID CONTAMINATION OF AIRCRAFT STRUCTURE AND SYSTEMS. OIL
SPILLAGE MUST BE REMOVED IMMEDIATELY.

CAUTION:

TAKE STRINGENT PRECAUTIONS TO AVOID CONTAMINATION OF THE OIL


SYSTEM. FIT PROTECTIVE COVERS TO EXPOSED OIL PASSAGES AND
COMPONENTS IMMEDIATELY AFTER REMOVAL.

1. Filling and Bleeding of the Propeller


A.

Reason for the Job


To fill and bleed propeller pitch change oil control system after
installation or as a result of troubleshooting.

B.

Equipment and Materials


ITEM

DESIGNATION

(1)

ITEM 20-15-01

Circuit Breaker Safety Clips and Tags

(2)

Standard Tool

Servicing Platform, 3m (10 ft)

(3)

Standard Tool

Warning Notices

(4)

Z-20.304

Volatile Corrosion Inhibitor

Effectivity: See TOC

61-20-00

Pag. 301
May 15/15

CN-235 MAINTENANCE MANUAL


DESIGNATION

ITEM
(5)

Z-21.102

Synthetic Oil for Engines

(6)

Z-24.930

Lint-Free Cotton Cloth

(7)

MS20995C20

Lockwire

(8)

110-3-8

Packing

Referenced Procedures:
- 12-13-10, P. Block 1
- 61-10-00, P. Block 701
- 61-10-10, P. Block 401
C.

- Propeller Gearbox Lubrication


- Propeller Assembly
- Propeller Assembly

Procedure
(1) Job Set-Up
(a) Put the warning notices in position.
(b) Open, safety and tag, with ITEM 20-15-01, these circuit
breakers:
PANEL

SERVICE

FIN

BATTERY BUS 1

START

KA1

BATTERY BUS 1

FTR

KC5

BATTERY BUS 2

FTR

KC4

(c) Put the servicing platform in position.


(d) Remove the spinner (Ref. 61-10-10, P. Block 401).
(e) Clean the propeller hub thoroughly
(Ref. 61-10-00, P. Block 701).
(f) Make sure that the propeller gearbox oil level is correct
(Ref. 12-13-10, P. Block 1).
(g) Make sure that the propeller is in feather position.
(2) Servicing - Filling and Bleeding (Fig. 301 and Fig. 301A)
(a) Remove and discard the lockwire from the relief valve
assembly on the pitch change control body.

Effectivity: See TOC

61-20-00

Pag. 302
May 15/15

CN-235 MAINTENANCE MANUAL


(b) Turn the propeller assembly until the arrow on the oil check
label is in the vertical position at the top.
(c) Make sure that the valve assembly area is clean and free
from oil and dirt deposits.
(d) Remove the valve assembly and packing from the body. Discard
the packing.
(e) Clean the valve port with a lint-free cotton cloth,
Z-24.930.
(f)
WARNING:

BE CAREFUL WHEN YOU USE THE MATERIAL Z-21.102 OR


Z-20.304. OBEY THE MATERIAL MANUFACTURER'S
INSTRUCTIONS.

Using the same type specification of oil as that in the


propeller gearbox, fill or add clean unused oil, Z-21.102,
(add volatile corrosion inhibitor, Z-20.304) through the
valve port until the oil is leveled with the bottom of the
valve opening.
NOTE:

** On A/C:

PRE.SB.14RF-21-61-61 from Hamilton Standard


NOTE:

** On A/C:

The proportion of the volatile corrosion inhibitor,


Z-20.304, is: 15 ml (0.0039 US gal) of volatile
corrosion inhibitor for each 0,946 l (0.25 US gal)
of oil, Z-21.102.

Make sure that the quantity oil is not more than 2,5
quarts (2,37 l).

POST.SB.14RF-21-61-61 from Hamilton Standard


NOTE:

Make sure that the quantity oil is not more than 5,6
quarts (5,3 l).

** On A/C: All
(g) Install a new packing , 110-3-8, on the valve assembly and
install the valve in the body. Torque the valve to between
5,6 Nm (50 lbf.in) and 7,9 Nm (70 lbf.in).
(h) Safety the valve assembly to the body with new lockwire,
MS20995C20.
(3) Close-Up

Effectivity: See TOC

61-20-00

Pag. 303
May 15/15

CN-235 MAINTENANCE MANUAL


(a) Make sure that there are no oil leaks from the propeller
assembly.
(b) Make sure that the propeller gearbox oil level is correct
(Ref. 12-13-10, P. Block 1).
(c) Install the spinner on the propeller assembly
(Ref. 61-10-10, P. Block 401).
(d) Remove the servicing platform.
(e) Remove the safety clips and tags, ITEM 20-15-01, and close
these circuit breakers:
PANEL

SERVICE

FIN

BATTERY BUS 1

START

KA1

BATTERY BUS 1

FTR

KC5

BATTERY BUS 2

FTR

KC4

(f) Remove the warning notices.


(g) Remove all tools and equipment from the work area. Make sure
that the work area is clean.

Effectivity: See TOC

61-20-00

Pag. 304
May 15/15

CN-235 MAINTENANCE MANUAL


Propeller Controlling - Servicing

CM1.61.20.00.3AO.00.00-02

Fig. 301 Propeller Controlling - Servicing

Effectivity: PRE.SB.14RF-21-61-61
from Hamilton Standard

61-20-00

Pag. 305
May 15/15

CN-235 MAINTENANCE MANUAL

CM1.61.20.00.3AA.00.00-00

Propeller Controlling - Servicing


Fig. 301A Propeller Controlling - Servicing

Effectivity: POST.SB.14RF-21-61-61
from Hamilton Standard

61-20-00

Pag. 306
May 15/15

CN-235 MAINTENANCE MANUAL


2. Check of the Propeller Oil Level
A.

Reason for the Job


To do the 61.10.00.01 MRB task (MRB Document PV02M), "Check Propeller
Oil level".

B.

Equipment and Materials


ITEM

DESIGNATION

(1)

ITEM 20-15-01

Circuit Breaker Safety Clips and Tags

(2)

Standard Tool

Servicing Platform, 3m (10 ft)

(3)

Standard Tool

Warning Notices

(4)

Z-24.930

Lint-Free Cotton Cloth

(5)

MS20995C20

Lockwire

(6)

110-3-8

Packing

Referenced Procedures:
- 61-10-00, P. Block 701
- 61-10-10, P. Block 401
C.

- Propeller Assembly
- Propeller Assembly

Procedure
(1) Job Set-Up
(a) Put the warning notices in position.
(b) Open, safety and tag, with ITEM 20-15-01, these circuit
breakers:
PANEL

SERVICE

FIN

BATTERY BUS 1

START

KA1

BATTERY BUS 1

FTR

KC5

BATTERY BUS 2

FTR

KC4

(c) Put the servicing platform in position.


(d) Remove the spinner (Ref. 61-10-10, P. Block 401).

Effectivity: See TOC

61-20-00

Pag. 307
May 15/15

CN-235 MAINTENANCE MANUAL


(e) Clean the propeller hub thoroughly
(Ref. 61-10-00, P. Block 701).
(f) Make sure that the propeller is in feather position.
(2) Servicing - Check of the Propeller Oil Level (Fig. 301 and Fig.
301A)
(a) Remove and discard the lockwire from the relief valve
assembly on the pitch change control body.
(b) Turn the propeller assembly until the arrow on the oil check
label is in the vertical position at the top.
(c) Make sure that the valve assembly area is clean and free
from oil and dirt deposits.
(d) Remove the valve assembly and packing from the body. Discard
the packing.
(e) Clean the valve port with a lint-free cotton cloth,
Z-24.930.
(f) Check that the oil is level with the bottom of opening.
Refill as necessary with oil.
(g) Install a new packing, 110-3-8, on the valve assembly and
install the valve in the body. Torque the valve to between
5,6 Nm (50 lbf.in) and 7,9 Nm (70 lbf.in).
(h) Safety the valve assembly to the body with new lockwire,
MS20995C20.
(3) Close-Up
(a) Make sure that there are no oil leaks from the propeller
assembly.
(b) Install the spinner on the propeller assembly
(Ref. 61-10-10, P. Block 401).
(c) Remove the servicing platform.

Effectivity: See TOC

61-20-00

Pag. 308
May 15/15

CN-235 MAINTENANCE MANUAL


(d) Remove the safety clips and tags, ITEM 20-15-01, and close
these circuit breakers:
PANEL

SERVICE

FIN

BATTERY BUS 1

START

KA1

BATTERY BUS 1

FTR

KC5

BATTERY BUS 2

FTR

KC4

(e) Remove the warning notices.


(f) Remove all tools and equipment from the work area. Make sure
that the work area is clean.

Effectivity: See TOC

61-20-00

Pag. 309
May 15/15

CN-235 MAINTENANCE MANUAL

INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK

Effectivity: See TOC

61-20-00

Pag. 310
May 15/15

CN-235 MAINTENANCE MANUAL


PROPELLER CONTROLLING
ADJUSTMENT/TEST
WARNING:

BEFORE ELECTRICAL POWER IS SUPPLIED TO THE AIRCRAFT, MAKE SURE THAT


ELECTRICAL CIRCUITS UPON WHICH WORK IS IN PROGRESS ARE ISOLATED.

1. Functional Test of Feather Auxiliary Pumps, KC41 and KC42, and Timers,
KC15 and KC16
A.

Reason for the Job


- To make sure that a replacement component is operational after the
installation on the aircraft and that the associated electrical
circuits are serviceable.
- To do the MRB 61.20.00.01 task (MRB Document PV02M), "Operational
check of Auxiliary Motor and Feather Timer".

B.

Equipment and Materials


ITEM

DESIGNATION

(1)

Servicing Platform, 3 m (10 ft)

(2)

ITEM 24-40-01 or
ITEM 24-40-02

Ground Power Unit (GPU)

(3)

Warning Notices

(4)

ITEM 20-15-01

Circuit Breaker Safety Clips and Tags

(5)

Blanking Plugs and Caps

Referenced Procedures:
- 24-40-00, P. Block 201
- 06-41-54, P. Block 1
C.

- External Power
- Access Provision - Nacelles

Procedure
(1) Job Set-Up
(a) Put warning notices in position.
(b) Open, safety and tag the circuit breaker START, KA1.

Effectivity: See TOC

61-20-00

Pag. 501
Nov. 15/13

CN-235 MAINTENANCE MANUAL


(c) Put the servicing platform in position under the
corresponding engine and make sure that the propeller
movements is free.
(d) Remove the related cowling 413AL/423AL
(Ref. 06-41-54, P. Block 1).
(e) Put warning notices in the flight compartment, telling
personnel not to run the engines.
(f) Connect the GPU and switch on the aircraft electrical system
(Ref. 24-40-00, P. Block 201).
(g) Close the following circuit breakers:
PANEL

SERVICE

BATTERY BUS 1

FTR
AUTO FTR

KC5
KC7

BATTERY BUS 2

FTR

KC4

CAUTION:

FIN

MAKE SURE THAT THE MAN SWITCH, KC51, ON THE


FEATHER SYSTEM CONTROL UNIT, KC50, IS IN THE
MIDDLE POSITION.

(h) Disconnect the connectors from the feather solenoids, KC35


and KC36. Install protective blanking plugs and caps to the
related connectors and receptacles.
(2) Test
ACTION

RESULT

(a) In the flight compartment,


set the condition lever (CL)
on the left engine to MAX RPM
position and the power lever
(PL) to MAX REVERSE position.
(b) In the FEATHER SYST control
unit, KC50, set and hold the
MAN switch, KC51, to L
position.

Effectivity: See TOC

The left propeller blades go


to MAX REVERSE position.

61-20-00

Pag. 502
Nov. 15/13

CN-235 MAINTENANCE MANUAL


RESULT

ACTION

WARNING:

NOTE:

DO NOT LEAVE THE MAN SWITCH, KC51, ON THE FEATHER


SYSTEM CONTROL UNIT, KC50, SWITCHED ON MORE THAN 30
SECONDS. THE NORMAL OPERATION OF THE AUXILIARY PUMP,
KC41/KC42, IS 30 SECONDS IN ON, 10 MINUTES IN OFF.

The timer, KC15/KC16, of the auxiliary pump, KC41/KC42,


switches off the electrical power to the pump after 30
seconds.
The operation time from FEATHER to MAX REVERSE is 10
seconds, approximately.

(c) Move the power lever (PL) to


GND IDLE position and the
condition lever (CL) to FUEL
OFF position.
(d) Set the MAN switch, KC51, to
The left propeller blades go
L position and return it to
to FEATHER position.
the middle position before 30
seconds.
(e) In the flight compartment,
set the condition lever (CL)
on the right engine to MAX
RPM position and the power
lever (PL) to MAX REVERSE
position.
(f) In the FEATHER SYST control
unit, KC50, set and hold the
MAN switch, KC51, to R
position. Return the switch,
KC51, to the middle position
before 30 seconds.

The right propeller blades go


to MAX REVERSE position.

(g) Move the power lever (PL) to


GND IDLE position and the
condition lever (CL) to FUEL
OFF position.
(h) Set the MAN switch, KC51, to
The right propeller blades go
R position and return it to
to FEATHER position.
the middle position before 30
seconds.

Effectivity: See TOC

61-20-00

Pag. 503
Nov. 15/13

CN-235 MAINTENANCE MANUAL


(3) Close-Up
(a) Open the circuit breakers previously closed.
(b) Remove protective blanking plugs and caps from the
connectors and feather solenoids (KC35/KC36).
(c) Connect the connectors to the feather solenoids, KC35/KC36.
(d) Make sure that the propeller gearbox oil levels are correct.
(e) Make sure that the working area is clean and clear of tools
and miscellaneous equipment.
(f) Install the cowlings 413AL/423AL previously removed
(Ref. 06-41-54, P. Block 1).
(g) Switch off the aircraft electrical system and disconnect the
GPU (Ref. 24-40-00, P. Block 201).
(h) Remove the servicing platform.
(j) Remove the warning notices.

Effectivity: See TOC

61-20-00

Pag. 504
Nov. 15/13

CN-235 MAINTENANCE MANUAL


** On A/C: Series 300
CAUTION:

MAKE SURE THAT THE ENGINE OPERATES WITHIN LIMITS DURING THIS
OPERATION TEST (Ref.71-00-00, P. Block 501).

2. Propeller Overspeed System Test


A.

Reason for the Job


To do the 61.26.00.02 MRB task (MRB document PV02M) "Operational
check of Overspeed Governor"

B.

Equipment and Materials


ITEM

DESIGNATION

(1)

Warning Notices

Referenced Procedures:
- 71-00-00, P. Block 501
C.

- Powerplant

Procedure
(1) Job Set-Up
(a) Put warning notices in position.
(b) Start the engines (Ref. 71-00-00, P. Block 501).
(c) Make sure that the Power Levers are in Ground Idle (GI)
position and the propellers are feathered.
(2) Test
ACTION

RESULT

(a) On the CONTROL QUADRANT set


Make sure that the propeller
the Condition Lever (CL) of
is not feathered.
the LH engine to an unfeather
position.
(b) Move the CL and PL to get 87%
Np and 37% TQ respectively.

Effectivity: See TOC

61-20-00

Pag. 505
Nov. 15/13

ACTION

CN-235 MAINTENANCE MANUAL


RESULT

(c) On the overhead panel at the


SYSTEM TESTS Control Unit,
push and hold the PROPELLER
OVSP GOVERNOR switch L.

The Np should drop to 66%


approx.
The Np should stabilize at
72% approx.

(d) Release the PROPELLER OVSP


GOVERNOR L switch and return
the CL and PL to the MIN RPM
and GND IDLE respectively.
(e) Repeat the steps (a) thru (d)
on PROPELLER OVSP GOVERNOR R
switch and the CL and PL of
the RH engine.

(3) Close-Up
(a) Stop the engines (Ref. 71-00-00, P. Block 501).
(b) Remove the warning notices.

Effectivity: See TOC

61-20-00

Pag. 506
Nov. 15/13

CN-235 MAINTENANCE MANUAL


SYNCHROPHASING CONTROL UNIT,

KD3

REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
MAKE SURE THAT ELECTRICAL CIRCUITS INVOLVED ARE ISOLATED.

WARNING:

1. Equipment and Materials


ITEM

DESIGNATION

A.

ITEM 20-15-01

Circuit Breaker Safety Clip and Tag

B.

Protective Plug and Cap

Referenced Procedures:
- 06-41-51, P. Block 1
- 71-00-00, P. Block 501

- Access - Interior
- Powerplant

2. Procedure
A.

Job Set-Up
(1) Open, safety and tag the following circuit breaker:
PANEL

SERVICE

L MISCELLANEOUS

SYNC PROP

FIN
KD1

(2) Remove access panel 222CR (Ref. 06-41-51, P. Block 1).


B.

Removal (Fig. 401)


(1) Disconnect connector (5) from receptacle (6).
(2) Remove four screws (3) and washers (2).
(3) Move unit (7) from work area.
(4) Install protection to connector (5) and receptacle (6).

Effectivity: See TOC

61-20-10

Pag. 401
Oct. 15/00

CN-235 MAINTENANCE MANUAL


C.

Preparation of Replacement Component (Fig. 401)


(1) Remove protection from receptacle (6).
(2) Inspect replacement component for signs of damage.

D.

Preparation for Installation (Fig. 401)


(1) Remove protection from connector (5).
(2) Inspect connector (5) and harness (4) for damage.

E.

Installation (Fig. 401)


(1) Put unit (7) in position and fasten to rack (1) with screws (3)
and washers (2).
(2) Connect connector (5) to receptacle (6).

F.

Test
(1) Do the test of the propeller synchronization system
(Ref. 71-00-00, P. Block 501).

G.

Close-Up
(1) Install access panel previously removed
(Ref. 06-41-51, P. Block 1).
(2) Remove safety clip and tag and close circuit breaker KD1.
(3) Make sure that the work area is clean and clear of tools and
miscellaneous equipment.

Effectivity: See TOC

61-20-10

Pag. 402
Oct. 15/00

CN-235 MAINTENANCE MANUAL


Synchrophasing Control Unit, KD3

CM1.61.20.10.4AO.00.00-02

Fig. 401 Synchrophasing Control Unit, KD3

Effectivity: FR02 (09-13), SERIES 10, SERIES 100

61-20-10

Pag. 403
Oct. 15/00

CN-235 MAINTENANCE MANUAL

CM1.61.20.10.4AA.00.00-00

Synchrophasing Control Unit, KD3


Fig. 401A Synchrophasing Control Unit, KD3

Effectivity: CL01, SERIES 300

61-20-10

Pag. 404
Oct. 15/00

CN-235 MAINTENANCE MANUAL


SWITCHER,

KC80

REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
MAKE SURE THAT RELEVANT ELECTRICAL CIRCUITS INVOLVED ARE ISOLATED.

WARNING:

1. Reason for the Job


To remove and install the switcher when its operation is faulty or when
its removal has been requested for access to surrounding components.
2. Equipment and Materials
ITEM

DESIGNATION

A.

ITEM 20-15-01

Circuit Breaker Safety Clips and Tags

B.

Protective Plugs and Caps

Referenced Procedures:
- 06-41-51, P. Block 1
- 71-00-00, P. Block 501

- Access Provision - Interior


- Power Plant

3. Procedure
A.

Job Set-Up
(1) Open, safety and tag the following circuit breaker:
PANEL

SERVICE

BATTERY BUS 1

AUTO FTR

FIN
KC7

(2) Remove access panel 221CL (Ref.06-41-51, P. Block 1).


B.

Removal (Fig. 401)


(1) Disconnect electrical connectors ( 1) and (4).
(2) Remove four screws (8) and washers (9) while holding switcher ( 7)
in position.
(3) Move switcher ( 7) from work area.

Effectivity: See TOC

61-20-11

CONFIG. 2
Pag. 401
Jun. 30/02

CN-235 MAINTENANCE MANUAL


(4) Install protection to connectors ( 1) and (4) and receptacles (5)
and ( 6).
C.

Preparation of Replacement Component (Fig. 401)


(1) Remove protection from receptacle (5) and ( 6).
(2) Inspect replacement component for signs of damage.

D.

Preparation for Installation (Fig. 401)


(1) Remove protection from connector (1) and ( 4).
(2) Inspect connectors (1) and (4), harness (2) and ( 3), and support
(10) for signs of damage.

E.

Installation (Fig. 401)


(1) Hold switcher ( 7) in position on support (10).
(2) Fasten switcher ( 7) with four washers (9) and screws (8).
(3) Connect electrical connectors ( 1) and (4) in receptacles (5) and
(6).

F.

Test
(1) Do the test of propeller autofeather system
(Ref.71-00-00, P. Block 501).

G.

Close-Up
(1) Install the access panel previously removed
(Ref.06-41-51, P. Block 1).
(2) Remove safety clip and tag and close the circuit breaker
previously opened.
(3) Make sure that the work area is clean and clear of tools and
miscellaneous equipment.

Effectivity: See TOC

61-20-11

CONFIG. 2
Pag. 402
Jun. 30/02

CN-235 MAINTENANCE MANUAL


Switcher, KC80

CM1.61.20.11.4AO.00.02-01

Fig. 401 Switcher, KC80

Effectivity: See TOC

61-20-11

CONFIG. 2
Pag. 403
Jun. 30/02

CN-235 MAINTENANCE MANUAL

INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK

Effectivity: See TOC

61-20-11

CONFIG. 2
Pag. 404
Jun. 30/02

CN-235 MAINTENANCE MANUAL


FEATHER SYST CONTROL UNIT,

KC50

DESCRIPTION/OPERATION

1. General
The FEATHER SYST control unit KC50 has the necessary components to operate
the propeller feather system in auto and manual modes.
2. Description (Fig. 1)
The FEATHER SYST control unit KC50 is located at the lower part of the
overhead panel and has the following items:
A.

CONT (ON/OFF) Switch, KC25 (1)

B.

CMPTR (TEST/RESET) Switch, KC24 (2)

C.

FTR TEST (L/R) Switch, KC23 (3)

** On A/C: All, except FR02 (09-13), PRE.SB.235-61-04M


D.

ARM/FAIL Lighted Indicator, KC26 (4)

** On A/C: FR02 (09-13), POST.SB.235-61-04M


D.

ARM (TO/APP) Lighted Indicator, KC26 (4)

** On A/C: All
E.

MAN (L/R) Switch, KC51 (5)

F.

Connector KC50A (6)

G.

Relays KC68 (7), KC64 (8) and KC65 (9)

** On A/C: POST.SB.235-73-01M, TK04(05-16), FR02(09-13)


H.

Relay KC81 (10).

** On A/C: All
The FEATHER SYST control unit KC50 is divided in two parts: autofeather
items and manual feather items.
For further information refer to CASA CMM 61-20-11.

Effectivity: See TOC

61-20-12

CONFIG. 2
Pag. 1
Jun. 30/02

CN-235 MAINTENANCE MANUAL

3. Components Description
A.

CONT (ON/OFF) Switch, KC25


The CONT (ON/OFF) switch, KC25, is a two positions toggle switch,
ON/OFF, which energizes, in its ON position, the autofeather computer
and begins its self-test.

B.

CMPTR (TEST/RESET) Switch, KC24


The CMPTR (TEST/RESET) switch, KC24, is a toggle switch that, in TEST
position, does a test of the computer circuits and sets the ARM and
FAIL lights and AUTOFTR warning light on. In the RESET position, the
CMPTR switch sets these lights off.

C.

FTR TEST (L/R) Switch, KC23


The FTR TEST (L/R) switch, KC23, is a toggle switch used to simulate,
on ground, the necessary conditions for autofeathering and causes the
autofeathering of the left (position L) and right (position R)
propeller.

** On A/C: All, except FR02 (09-13), PRE.SB.235-61-04M


D.

ARM/FAIL Lighted Indicator, KC26


The ARM/FAIL lighted indicator, KC26, provides two indications:
- The ARM green light on, means that the computer is ready to feather
the propeller of the engine that fails in takeoff.
- The FAIL yellow light on, means that the computer has detected a
failure in its circuits.

** On A/C: FR02 (09-13), POST.SB.235-61-04M


D.

ARM (TO/APP) Lighted Indicator, KC26


The ARM (TO/APP) lighted indicator, KC26, provides two indications:
- The TO green light on, means that the Computer is ready to feather
the propeller of the engine that fails in take-off.
- The APP green light on, means that the computer is ready to feather
the propeller of the engine that fails in the approach.

Effectivity: See TOC

61-20-12

CONFIG. 2
Pag. 2
Jun. 30/02

CN-235 MAINTENANCE MANUAL


FEATHER SYST Control Unit, KC50

CM1.61.20.12.0AO.00.02-01

Fig. 1 FEATHER SYST Control Unit, KC50

Effectivity: PRE.SB.235-73-01M, FR02 (07-08)


TK01, TK02, TK03, TK04 (01-04)

61-20-12

CONFIG. 2
Pag. 3
Jun. 30/02

CN-235 MAINTENANCE MANUAL


** On A/C: All
E.

MAN (L/R) Switch, KC51


The MAN (L/R) switch, KC51, is a toggle switch that controls the
manual feather operation of the left (position L) and right (position
R) propeller, assisted by the auxiliary pump KC41 (KC42), through the
relays KC64 and KC65.

Effectivity: See TOC

61-20-12

CONFIG. 2
Pag. 4
Jun. 30/02

CN-235 MAINTENANCE MANUAL

CM1.61.20.12.0AA.00.02-02

FEATHER SYST Control Unit, KC50


Fig. 1A FEATHER SYST Control Unit, KC50

Effectivity: POST.SB.235-73-01M, TK04A, TK04B


TK04(05-16), FR02(09-13)

61-20-12

CONFIG. 2
Pag. 5
Jun. 30/02

CN-235 MAINTENANCE MANUAL

INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK

Effectivity: See TOC

61-20-12

CONFIG. 2
Pag. 6
Jun. 30/02

CN-235 MAINTENANCE MANUAL


FEATHER SYST CONTROL UNIT,

KC50

REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
BEFORE ELECTRICAL POWER IS SUPPLIED TO THE AIRCRAFT, MAKE SURE THAT
ELECTRICAL CIRCUITS UPON WHICH WORK IS IN PROGRESS ARE ISOLATED.

WARNING:

1. Equipment and Materials


ITEM

DESIGNATION

A.

Protective Plugs and Caps

B.

ITEM 20-15-01

Circuit Breaker Safety Clips and Tags

C.

Warning Notices

Referenced Procedures:
- 31-52-00, P. Block 501
- 71-00-00, P. Block 501

- Unsafe Take-Off Configuration Warning


- Power Plant

2. Procedure
A.

Job Set-Up
(1) Open, safety and tag the following circuit breakers:
PANEL

SERVICE

FIN

BATTERY BUS 1

AUTO FTR

KC7

BATTERY BUS 1 (2)

FTR

KC5 (KC4)

BATTERY BUS 1

WARNING 1

QB47

(2) Put warning notices in position telling personnel that


maintenance task is in progress.
B.

Removal (Fig. 401)


(1) Hold control unit (5) and remove screws (4).
(2) Withdraw control unit (5) from panel (3).
(3) Disconnect connector (2) from receptacle (1).
(4) Install protection to connector (2) and receptacle (1).

Effectivity: See TOC

61-20-12

CONFIG. 1
Pag. 401
Oct. 15/00

CN-235 MAINTENANCE MANUAL


(5) Remove the control unit (5) from the work area.
C.

Preparation for Installation (Fig. 401)


(1) Inspect panel (3) for damage.
(2) Remove protection and inspect connector (2) for signs of damage.

D.

Installation (Fig. 401)


(1) Hold control unit (5) and connect connector (2) to receptacle
(1).
(2) Put the control unit in position in panel (3) and attach with
screws (4).

E.

Test
(1) Do adjustment/test procedure on unsafe take-off configuration
warning system (Ref. 31-52-00, P. Block 501).
(2) Do the test of the autofeather system
(Ref. 71-00-00, P. Block 501).

F.

Close-Up
(1) Remove the safety clips and tags, and close the circuit breakers
previously opened.
(2) Remove warning notices.
(3) Make sure that the work area is clean and clear of tools and
miscellaneous equipment.

Effectivity: See TOC

61-20-12

CONFIG. 1
Pag. 402
Oct. 15/00

CN-235 MAINTENANCE MANUAL


FEATHER SYST Control Unit, KC50

CM1.61.20.12.4AO.00.01-00

Fig. 401 FEATHER SYST Control Unit, KC50

Effectivity: AL01, AL02, AL03, AL04, AL05, AL06,


IB02, IB05, QC02, TH01, SERIES 10

61-20-12

CONFIG. 1
Pag. 403
Oct. 15/00

CN-235 MAINTENANCE MANUAL

CM1.61.20.12.4AA.00.01-00

FEATHER SYST Control Unit, KC50


Fig. 401A FEATHER SYST Control Unit, KC50

Effectivity: EA02, FR01, FR02, GA01, IR01, KR01,


NG01, OM01, TK01, TK02, TK03, TK04

61-20-12

CONFIG. 1
Pag. 404
Oct. 15/00

CN-235 MAINTENANCE MANUAL


AUXILIARY PUMP,

KC41 (KC42)

REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
WARNING:

MAKE CERTAIN THAT RELEVANT ELECTRICAL CIRCUITS ARE ISOLATED.

1. Equipment and Materials


ITEM

DESIGNATION

A.

Servicing Platform, 3 m (10 ft)

B.

Drip Tray

C.

Warning Notices

D.

ITEM 20-15-01

Circuit Breaker Safety Clips and Tags

E.

Preformed Packing

F.

Protective Plugs and Caps

Referenced Procedures:
- 61-20-00, P. Block 501

- Propeller Controlling

2. Procedure
A.

Job Set-Up
(1) Open, safety and tag the following circuit breakers:
PANEL

SERVICE

FIN

BATTERY BUS 1

START
FTR
AUTO-FTR

KA1
KC5
KC7

BATTERY BUS 2

FTR

KC4

(2) Put access platform under engine.


(3) Put drip tray under propeller gearbox.

Effectivity: See TOC

61-20-13

Pag. 401
Mar. 31/00

CN-235 MAINTENANCE MANUAL


Auxiliary Pump KC41 (KC42)

CM1.61.20.13.4AO.00.00-02

Fig. 401 Auxiliary Pump KC41 (KC42)

Effectivity: See TOC

61-20-13

Pag. 402
Mar. 31/00

CN-235 MAINTENANCE MANUAL


(4) Remove cowling 413AL/423AL.
(5) Put notices in position telling personnel not to run engines.
B.

Removal (Fig. 401)


(1) Remove lockwire from connector and receptacle.
(2) Disconnect connector (13) from receptacle (1). Install protection
to connector and receptacle.
(3) Hold pump (2) and remove nuts (3) and washers (4).
(4) Remove pump (2) from studs (9).
(5) Remove transfer tubes (7), (12). Remove and discard preformed
packings (6), (11).
(6) Remove inlet screen (5) from pump inlet port.
(7) Install protection to gearbox mounting flange.
(8) Make certain that any oil spillage is wiped up immediately.

C.

Preparation of Replacement Component )(Fig. 401)


(1) Inspect replacement component for signs of damage.
(2) Remove protective coverings.
(3) Clean inlet screen (5) by flushing with oil.
(4) Reinstall inlet screen (5) in pump inlet port.
(5) Install new preformed packings (6), (11).

D.

Preparation for Installation (Fig. 401)


(1) Remove protection from connector (13) and inspect for signs of
damage.
(2) Inspect mounting face and attachment studs (9) for signs of
damage.
(3) Make certain that oilways are clean and clear of foreign objects.

E.

Installation (Fig. 401)


(1) Put pump (2) on studs (9).

Effectivity: See TOC

61-20-13

Pag. 403
Mar. 31/00

CN-235 MAINTENANCE MANUAL


(2) Install washers (4) and nuts (3) on studs (7). Torque tighten
nuts (3) to between 73 and 87 lb.in (7,2 and 8,5 Nm).
(3) Connect connector (13) and safety with lockwire.
F.

Test
(1) Make certain that oil levels are correct.
(2) Refer to adjustment/test procedure (Ref. 61-20-00, P. Block 501).

G.

Close-Up
(1) Make certain that working area is clean and clear of tools and
miscellaneous equipment.
(2) Install removed cowling.
(3) Remove drip tray from under gearbox. Dispose of any drained oil
in approved disposal area. Wipe up any oil spillage.
(4) Remove access platform.
(5) Remove safety clips and tags and close circuit breakers KA1, KC4,
KC5, KC7.
(6) Remove warning notices.

Effectivity: See TOC

61-20-13

Pag. 404
Mar. 31/00

CN-235 MAINTENANCE MANUAL


OVERSPEED GOVERNOR,

KC37 (KC38)

REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
WARNING:

MAKE CERTAIN THAT RELEVANT ELECTRICAL CIRCUITS ARE ISOLATED.

1. Equipment and Materials


ITEM

DESIGNATION

A.

Servicing Platform, 3 m (10 ft)

B.

Drip Tray

C.

Warning Notices

D.

ITEM 20-15-01

Circuit Breaker Safety Clips and Tags

E.

M83248-1-014
M83248-1-032

Preformed Packing

F.

Protective Plug and Cap

Referenced Procedures:
- 71-00-00, P. Block 501

- Power Plant

2. Procedure
A.

Job Set-Up
(1) Open, safety and tag the following circuit breakers:
PANEL

SERVICE

FIN

BATTERY BUS 1

START
BETA

KA1
KC1

BATTERY BUS 2

BETA

KC2

(2) Put access platform under engine.


(3) Put drip tray under propeller gearbox.
(4) Remove cowling 413AL/423AL.
(5) Put warning notices in position telling personnel not to run
engines.

Effectivity: See TOC

61-20-14

Pag. 401
Mar. 31/00

CN-235 MAINTENANCE MANUAL


B.

Removal (Fig. 401)


(1) Remove lockwire from connector (7).
(2) Disconnect connector (7) from receptacle (6). Install protection
to connector (7) and receptacle (6).
(3) Hold governor (3) and remove bolts (5) and washers (4).
(4) Remove governor (3) gearbox mounting flange (1).
(5) Remove preformed packings (2), (8) and put in waste container.
(6) Install protection to gearbox mounting flange (1).
(7) Make certain that any oil spillage is wiped up immediately.

C.

Preparation of Replacement Component (Fig. 401)


(1) Remove protection from replacement component.
(2) Inspect replacement component for signs of damage.
(3) Coat new preformed packings (2), (8) with gearbox oil and install
on overspeed governor (3).

D.

Preparation for Installation (Fig. 401)


(1) Remove protection from connector (7) and inspect for damage.
(2) Inspect mounting flange area for damage.
(3) Make certain that oilways (9), (10) are clean and clear of
foreign objects.

E.

Installation (Fig. 401)


(1) Align overspeed governor internal spur with gearbox drive quill
(11).
(2) Align governor ports with gearbox ports and carefully press in
until governor (3) is fully seated.
(3) Install washers (4) and bolts (5) and torque tighten bolts (6) to
between 55 and 70 lb.in (6,2 and 7,9 Nm).

Effectivity: See TOC

61-20-14

Pag. 402
Mar. 31/00

CN-235 MAINTENANCE MANUAL


Overspeed Governor KC37 (KC38)

CM1.61.20.14.4AO.00.00-02

Fig. 401 Overspeed Governor KC37 (KC38)

Effectivity: See TOC

61-20-14

Pag. 403
Mar. 31/00

CN-235 MAINTENANCE MANUAL


(4) Remove protection from connector (7). Connect connector (7) and
safety with lockwire.
F.

Test (Fig. 401)


(1) Make certain that oil levels are correct.
(2) Do the test of propeller overspeed system
(Ref. 71-00-00, P. Block 501).

G.

Close-Up
(1) Make certain that working area is clean and clear of tools and
miscellaneous equipment.
(2) Install removed cowling.
(3) Remove drip tray from under gearbox. Dispose of any drained oil
in approved disposal area. Wipe up any oil spillage.
(4) Remove access platform.
(5) Remove warning notices.

Effectivity: See TOC

61-20-14

Pag. 404
Mar. 31/00

CN-235 MAINTENANCE MANUAL


PRESSURE SWITCH,

KC33 (KC34)

REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
MAKE CERTAIN THAT RELEVANT ELECTRICAL CIRCUITS ARE ISOLATED.

WARNING:

1. Equipment and Materials


ITEM

DESIGNATION

A.

Servicing Platform, 3 m (10 ft)

B.

ITEM 20-15-01

Circuit Breaker Safety Clips and Tags

C.

Preformed Packing

D.

Protective Plug and Cap

Referenced Procedures:
- 06-41-54, P. Block 1
- 71-00-00, P. Block 501

- Access Provision - Nacelles


- Power Plant

2. Procedure
A.

Job Set-Up
(1) Open, safety and tag the following circuit breakers:
PANEL

SERVICE

BATTERY BUS 1

START
AUTO-FTR

FIN
KA1
KC7

(2) Put servicing platform in position under engine.


(3) Remove cowling (Ref. 06-41-54, P. Block 1).
B.

Removal (Fig. 401)


(1) Disconnect electrical connector (1) from pressure switch (7).
(2) Remove pipe connector (110) from reducer (9).

Effectivity: See TOC

61-20-15

Pag. 401
Mar. 31/00

CN-235 MAINTENANCE MANUAL


Pressure Switch KC33 (KC34)

CM1.61.20.15.4AO.00.00-03

Fig. 401 Pressure Switch KC33 (KC34)

Effectivity: See TOC

61-20-15

Pag. 402
Mar. 31/00

CN-235 MAINTENANCE MANUAL


(3) Remove bolt (2), washer (3) and spacer (4) from support bracket
(6).
(4) Remove clamp (5) from pressure switch (7).
(5) Install protection caps and plugs to reducer (9), connector (10),
electrical connector (1) and receptacle.
C.

Preparation of Replacement Component (Fig. 401)


(1) Remove lockwire and reducer (9) from pressure switch (7). Remove
and discard preformed packing (8).
(2) Install new preformed (8) on replacement pressure switch (7).
(3) Install removed reducer (9) to pressure switch (7). Tighten
reducer (9) to standard torque value and safety with lockwire.

D.

Installation (Fig. 401)


(1) Remove protective plugs and caps.
(2) Install clamp (5) to pressure switch (7).
(3) Install pipe connector (10) to reducer (9) and tighten to
standard torque value.
(4) Install bolt (2) and washer (3) to clamp (5) and support bracket
(6). Tighten bolt (2) to standard torque value.
(5) Connect electrical connector (1) to pressure switch (7).

E.

Test
(1) Do the test of propeller autofeather system
(Ref. 71-00-00, P. Block 501).

F.

Close-Up
(1) Make certain that work area is clean and clear of tools and
miscellaneous equipment.
(2) Install cowling (Ref. 06-41-54, P. Block 1).
(3) Remove servicing platform from aircraft.
(4) Remove safety clips and tags and close circuit breakers
previously opened.

Effectivity: See TOC

61-20-15

Pag. 403
Mar. 31/00

CN-235 MAINTENANCE MANUAL

INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK

Effectivity: See TOC

61-20-15

Pag. 404
Mar. 31/00

CN-235 MAINTENANCE MANUAL


CONTROL ADAPTER ASSEMBLY
REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
WARNING:

MAKE CERTAIN THAT RELEVANT ELECTRICAL CIRCUITS ARE ISOLATED.

CAUTION:

DURING THE STORAGE, HANDLING, OR INSTALLATION OF THE CONTROL


ADAPTER ASSEMBLY, DO NOT PLACE THE UNIT ON ANY SURFACE IN A MANNER
WHICH ALLOWS THE VALVE SOLENOID TO CONTACT THE SURFACE. THE VALVE
SOLENOID MAY BE DAMAGED AND CAUSES A FAIL IN THE PROPELLER CONTROL
OPERATION

1. Equipment and Materials


ITEM

DESIGNATION

A.

Servicing Platform, 3 m (10 ft)

B.

Drip Tray

C.

Warning Notices

D.

ITEM 20-15-01

Circuit Breaker Safety Clips and Tags

E.

M83248-1-015
M83248-1-012
M83248-1-014
M83248-1-058

Preformed Packings

F.

Protective Plug and Cap

G.

35-92039-0001

Riggings Pin

H.

MS20995C32

Lockwire stainless steel 0,8 mm(0,032 in)

Referenced Procedures:
- 61-10-10, P. Block 401
- 71-00-00, P. Block 501
- 76-10-00, P. Block 501

Effectivity: See TOC

- Propeller Assembly
- Power Plant
- Power and Condition Control

61-20-16

Pag. 401
Jul. 30/08

CN-235 MAINTENANCE MANUAL


2. Procedure
A.

Job Set-Up
(1) Open, safety and tag the following circuit breakers:
PANEL

SERVICE

FIN

BATTERY BUS 1

START
FTR
AUTO-FR
BETA

KA1
KC5
KC7
KC1

BATTERY BUS 2

FTR
BETA

KC4
KC2

L MISCELLANEOUS

SYNC PROP

KD1

(2) Put access platform under engine.


(3) Put drip tray under propeller gearbox.
(4) Remove cowling 413AL/423AL, 413AR/423AR.
(5) Put warning notices in position telling personnel not to run
engines.
(6) Remove oil transfer tube (Ref. 61-10-10, P. Block 401).
(7) In control quadrant put condition lever to START position and
power lever to FLIGHT IDLE position,
(Ref. 76-10-00, P. Block 501).
(8) Install rigging pins to HMU.
B.

Removal (Fig. 401)


(1) Disconnect feather solenoid connect (2) from receptacle (4).
(2) In control adapter of right propeller, disconnect connector (1)
from torque motor receptacle (3).
(3) Disconnect connector (17) from beta switch connector (16).
(4) Install protective plugs and caps to connectors and receptacles.

Effectivity: See TOC

61-20-16

Pag. 402
Jul. 30/08

CN-235 MAINTENANCE MANUAL


(5) Remove and discard cotter pins (18), remove nuts (19), washers
(20) and bolts (5) fastening engine control cables (27), (28) to
power lever (14) and condition lever (6).
(6) Remove bolts (26), washers (25), (22), plate (24) and support
(25) with control cables (27) and (28) from control adapter.
(7) Remove five bolts (16) and washers (15) fastening control adapter
to gearbox flange.
(8) Remove control and adapter assembly from aircraft.
(9) Remove transfer tubes (8), (10), (12). Remove and discard
preformed packings (7), (9), (11) and (13).
C.

Preparation of Replacement Component (Fig. 401)


(1) Coat preformed packings (7), (9), (11) with oil Z-21.101
Z-21.102 and install on transfer tubes (8), (10), (12).

or

(2) Install transfer tubes into adapter housing until fully seated.
(3) Coat preformed packing (13) with oil Z-21.101 or Z-21.102
install in groove in forward face of adapter housing.

and

(4) Put power and condition lever arms in rigging position and
install rigging pins 35-92039-0001.
D.

Preparation for Installation (Fig. 401)


(1) Inspect gearbox flange for damage and coat flange surface with
oil Z-21.101 or Z-21.102 .

E.

Installation (Fig. 401)


(1) Put control and adapter assembly (30) on gearbox until fully
seated.
(2) Install washers (15) and bolts (16) previously coated with oil,
Z-21.101 or Z-21.102 and torque tighten to 100-130 lb in
(115-149 kg.cm). Safety bolts with lockwire.
(3) Install support (23) with cables (27),(28), to control and
adapter Install bolts (26), washers (25) and (22) and plate (24).
Torque tighten bolts to 20-30 lb in. (23-34,5 kg.cm).

Effectivity: See TOC

61-20-16

Pag. 403
Jul. 30/08

CN-235 MAINTENANCE MANUAL


Control and Adapter Assembly

CM1.61.20.16.4AO.00.00-01

Fig. 401 Control and Adapter Assembly

Effectivity: See TOC

61-20-16

Pag. 404
Jul. 30/08

CN-235 MAINTENANCE MANUAL


(4) Install cable ends to condition lever arm (6) and power lever arm
(14) with bolts (5), washers (21) and nuts (20). Tighten nuts to
standard torque value and safety with new cotter pin (19).
(5) Remove protective caps and plugs from connectors and receptacles.
(6) Install connector (18) to beta switch receptacle (17).
(7) Install connector (2) to feather solenoid receptacle (4).
(8) Install connector (1) to torque motor (3) (only for right control
and adapter).
(9) Remove rigging pins from control and adapter and HMU.
(10) Install oil transfer tube (Ref. 61-10-10, P. Block 401).
F.

Test
(1) Do the power and condition controls adjustment/test as necessary
(Ref. 76-10-00, P. Block 501).
(2) Make certain that oil levels are correct and do the engine and
propeller ground running tests (Ref. 71-00-00, P. Block 501).

G.

Close-Up
(1) Make certain that working area is clean and clear of tools and
miscellaneous equipment.
(2) Remove drip tray. Wipe up any oil spillage.
(3) Install removed cowling.
(4) Remove access platform.
(5) Remove warning notices.

Effectivity: See TOC

61-20-16

Pag. 405
Jul. 30/08

CN-235 MAINTENANCE MANUAL

INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK

Effectivity: See TOC

61-20-16

Pag. 406
Jul. 30/08

CN-235 MAINTENANCE MANUAL


TIMER,

KC15 (KC16)

REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
WARNING:

BEFORE ELECTRICAL POWER IS SUPPLIED TO THE AIRCRAFT, MAKE SURE THAT


ELECTRICAL CIRCUITS UPON WHICH WORK IS IN PROGRESS ARE ISOLATED.

1. Reason for the Job


To remove and install the Timer KC15, when it is unserviceable or to get
access to other components.
2. Equipment and Materials
ITEM

DESIGNATION

A.

ITEM 20-15-01

Circuit Breaker Safety Clips and Tags

B.

MS20995C32

Lockwire

C.

Protective Plugs and Caps

Referenced Procedures:
- 61-41-51, P. Block 1
- 61-20-00, P. Block 501

- Access Provision - Interior


- Propeller Controlling

** On A/C: FR01 POST.SB.235-61-04M,


FR02 (01-08) POST.SB.235-61-04M
- 61-20-11, P. Block 401
- Switcher KC80
** On A/C: All
3. Procedure
A.

Job Set-Up
(1) Open, safety and tag the following circuit breakers:
PANEL

SERVICE

BATTERY BUS 1

AUTO FTR
FTR

KC7
KC5

BATTERY BUS 2

FTR

KC4

Effectivity: See TOC

FIN

61-20-17

CONFIG. 1
Pag. 401
Jun. 30/02

CN-235 MAINTENANCE MANUAL


(2) Remove the access panels 221CL (222CR)
(Ref. 06-41-51, P. Block 1).
** On A/C: FR01 POST.SB.235-61-04M,
FR02 (01-08) POST.SB.235-61-04M
(3) Remove the switcher KC80 (Ref.61-20-11, P. Block 401).
NOTE:

Only necessary for the timer KC15.

** On A/C:All
B.

Removal (Fig. 401, Fig. 402 y Fig. 403)

** On A/C: FR01 POST.SB.235-61-04M,


FR02 (01-08) POST.SB.235-61-04M
(1) Remove the screws (10) and washers (9).
(2) Remove the support (11) and spacers (8) from the support (1).
NOTE:

Only necessary for the timer KC15.

** On A/C: All
(3) Disconnect the electrical connector (6) from the receptacle (5).
(4) Put blanking caps on the connector (6) and receptacle (5).
(5) Remove the lockwire, hold the timer (4) and remove the screws (2)
and washers (3).
(6) Move the timer (4) from the work area.
C.

Preparation of Replacement Component (Fig. 401, Fig. 402 y Fig. 403)


(1) Remove protection from the receptacle (5).
(2) Inspect the replacement component for signs of damage.

D.

Preparation for Installation (Fig. 401, Fig. 402 y Fig. 403)


(1) Remove protection from the connector (6).
(2) Inspect the connector (6), the harness (7) and the support (1)
for signs of damage.

Effectivity: See TOC

61-20-17

CONFIG. 1
Pag. 402
Jun. 30/02

CN-235 MAINTENANCE MANUAL


Timer KC15 (KC16)

CM1.61.20.17.4AO.00.01-00

Fig. 401 Timer KC15 (KC16)

Effectivity: SERIE 10, SERIE 100, FR01 PRE.SB.235-61-04M


FR02 (01-08) PRE.SB.235-61-04M

61-20-17

CONFIG. 1
Pag. 403
Jun. 30/02

CN-235 MAINTENANCE MANUAL


** On A/C: FR01 POST.SB.235-61-04M,
FR02 (01-08) POST.SB.235-61-04M
(3) Inspect the spacers (8) and support (11) for signs of damage.
NOTE:

Spacers (8) and support (11) are only necessary for the
timer KC15.

** On A/C: All
E.

Installation (Fig. 401, Fig. 402 y Fig. 403)


(1) Hold the timer (4) in position on the support (1).
(2) Fasten the timer (4) with the screws (2) and washers (3). Safety
with lockwire.
(3) Connect the connector (6) to the receptacle (5).

** On A/C: FR01 POST.SB.235-61-04M,


FR02 (01-08) POST.SB.235-61-04M
(4) Hold the support (11) and spacers (8) on the support (1).
(5) Fasten support (11) with the screws (10) and washers (9).
NOTE:

Only necessary for the timer KC15.

** On A/C: All
F.

Test
(1) Do the adjustment/test procedure (Ref. 61-20-00, P. Block 501).

G.

Close-Up
(1) Install the removed access panels (Ref. 06-41-51, P. Block 1).
(2) Remove safety clips and tags and close circuit breakers KC4, KC5
and KC7.
(3) Make sure that the work area is clean and clear of tools and
miscellaneous equipment.

Effectivity: See TOC

61-20-17

CONFIG. 1
Pag. 404
Jun. 30/02

CN-235 MAINTENANCE MANUAL


Timer KC16

CM1.61.20.17.4BO.00.01-00

Fig. 402 Timer KC16

Effectivity: FR01 POST.SB.235-61-04M


FR02 (01-08) POST.SB.235-61-04M

61-20-17

CONFIG. 1
Pag. 405
Jun. 30/02

CN-235 MAINTENANCE MANUAL


Timer KC15

CM1.61.20.17.4CO.00.01-00

Fig. 403 Timer KC15

Effectivity: FR01 POST.SB.235-61-04M


FR02 (01-08) POST.SB.235-61-04M

61-20-17

CONFIG. 1
Pag. 406
Jun. 30/02

CN-235 MAINTENANCE MANUAL


AUTOFEATHER COMPUTER,

KC43

REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
MAKE CERTAIN THAT RELEVANT ELECTRICAL CIRCUITS INVOLVED ARE
ISOLATED

WARNING:

1. Reason for the Job


To remove and install an autofeather computer when its operation is faulty
or when its removal has been requested for access to surrounding
components.
2. Equipment and Materials
ITEM

DESIGNATION

A.

ITEM 20-15-01

Circuit Breaker Safety Clips and Tags

B.

Protective Plugs and Caps

C.

MS20995C32

Lockwire, Stainless Steel 0,8 mm (0,032 in)

Referenced Procedures:
- 06-41-51, P. Block 1
- 71-00-00, P. Block 501

- Access Provision - Interior


- Power Plant

3. Procedure
A.

Job Set-Up
(1) Open, safety and tag the following circuit breakers:
PANEL

SERVICE

BATTERY BUS 1

AUTO FTR

FIN
KC7

(2) Remove access panels 221CL (222CR) (Ref. 06-41-51, P. Block 1).
B.

Removal (Fig. 401)


(1) Disconnect electrical connector (3).

Effectivity: See TOC

61-20-18

Pag. 401
Mar. 31/00

CN-235 MAINTENANCE MANUAL


Autofeather Computer KC43

CM1.61.20.18.4AO.00.00-01

Fig. 401 Autofeather Computer KC43

Effectivity: See TOC

61-20-18

Pag. 402
Mar. 31/00

CN-235 MAINTENANCE MANUAL


(2) Remove lockwire, remove four screws (4) and washers (5) while
holding autofeather computer (6) in position.
(3) Move autofeather computer (6) from work area.
(4) Install protection to connector (3) and receptacle (2).
C.

Preparation of Replacement Component (Fig. 401)


(1) Remove protection from receptacle (2).
(2) Inspect replacement component for signs of damage.

D.

Preparation for Installation (Fig. 401)


(1) Remove protection from connector (3).
(2) Inspect connector (3) and mounting (1) for signs of damage.

E.

Installation (Fig. 401)


(1) Hold autofeather computer (6) in position on mounting (1).
(2) Fasten autofeather computer (6) to mounting (1) with four washers
(5) and screws (4). Safety screws (4) with lockwire.
(3) Connect electrical connector (3).

F.

Test
(1) Do the test of propeller autofeather system
(Ref. 71-00-00, P. Block 501).

G.

Close-Up
(1) Remove circuit breaker safety clips and tags.
(2) Make certain that work area is clean and clear of tools and
miscellaneous equipment.

Effectivity: See TOC

61-20-18

Pag. 403
Mar. 31/00

CN-235 MAINTENANCE MANUAL

INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK

Effectivity: See TOC

61-20-18

Pag. 404
Mar. 31/00

CN-235 MAINTENANCE MANUAL


MAGNETIC SENSOR,

KD4 (KD5)

REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
MAKE SURE THAT RELEVANT ELECTRICAL CIRCUITS INVOLVED ARE ISOLATED

WARNING:

1. Reason for the Job


To remove and install a magnetic sensor when its operation is faulty or
when its removal has been requested for access to surrounding components.
2. Equipment and Materials
ITEM

DESIGNATION

A.

ITEM 20-15-01

Circuit Breaker Safety Clip and Tag

B.

Protective Plugs and Caps

Referenced Procedures:
- 06-41-54, P. Block 1
- 71-00-00, P. Block 501

- Access Provision - Nacelles


- Power Plant

3. Procedure
A.

Job Set-Up
(1) Open, safety and tag the following circuit breaker:
PANEL

SERVICE

L MISCELLANEOUS

SYNC PROP

FIN
KD1

(2) Remove the cowling 412AR (422AR) (Ref. 06-41-54, P. Block 1).
B.

Removal (Fig. 401)


(1) Disconnect the electrical connector (1).
(2) Remove the lockwire and remove the nut (5) from the magnetic
sensor (6).

Effectivity: See TOC

61-20-19

Pag. 401
Mar. 31/00

CN-235 MAINTENANCE MANUAL


Magnetic Sensor KD4 (KD5)

CM1.61.20.19.4AO.00.00-00

Fig. 401 Magnetic Sensor KD4 (KD5)

Effectivity: See TOC

61-20-19

Pag. 402
Mar. 31/00

CN-235 MAINTENANCE MANUAL


(3) Pull the magnetic sensor (6) clear of mounting (4).
(4) Install the nut (5) on the magnetic sensor (6).
(5) Install the protective plug/cap on the connector (1) and the
receptacle (2).
C.

Reparation of Replacement Component (Fig. 401)


(1) Remove the protective plug/cap from the receptacle (2).
(2) Inspect the replacement component for signs of damage.
(3) Remove the nut (5).

D.

Preparation for Installation (Fig. 401)


(1) Remove the protective plug/cap from the connector (1).
(2) Inspect the connector (1) and the mounting (4) for signs of
damage.

E.

Installation (Fig. 401)


(1) Put the magnetic sensor (6) into the mounting (4) and position
the upper nut so that it extends approximately 0,5 inch (12,7
mm)below bottom of the mounting (4). Temporarily install the
lower nut (5) by tightening manually.
(2) With a 0,04 inch (1,0 mm) spacer between the magnetic sensor (6)
and the actuator, turn the upper nut (3) until the sensor
contacts the spacer. Hold the sensor and adjust the bottom nut
(5) by tightening manually.
(3) Remove the spacer and torque tighten the bottom nut (5) to 50-60
lb in. (57-69 kg.cm). Safety the nuts with lockwire.

F.

Test
(1) Do the test of propeller synchronization system
(Ref. 71-00-00, P. Block 501).
(2) Adjust the upper nut (3) to get a gap of 0,04 inch (1,0
mm)between the sensor (6) and the pick-up actuator.

Effectivity: See TOC

61-20-19

Pag. 403
Mar. 31/00

CN-235 MAINTENANCE MANUAL


G.

Close-Up
(1) Remove the safety clip and tag and close the circuit breaker SYNC
PROP, KD1.
(2) Make sure that the working area is clean and clear of tools and
miscellaneous equipment.

Effectivity: See TOC

61-20-19

Pag. 404
Mar. 31/00

CN-235 MAINTENANCE MANUAL


FLIGHT IDLE SOLENOID OVERRIDE CIRCUIT
DESCRIPTION/OPERATION

1. General
The control quadrant, ZD133, has a solenoid that locks the power levers
(PL's) at the FLT IDLE position. This prevents the accidental operation of
setting the PLs positions below the FLT IDLE when the aircraft is in
flight.
The Flight Idle Solenoid Override Circuit lets the pilot set the PL's
positions below the FLT IDLE in the conditions that follow:
- When the aircraft is on ground, by the automatic operation of the
related weight-on-wheel (WOW) microswitch.
- When the aircraft is on ground and the related WOW microswitch is
defective, by the manual operation of the FI SOL OVERRIDE
lighted-switch.
2. Component Location (Fig. 1)
ITEM

FIN

1.

ZD133

DESIGNATION

ZONE

ACCESS
PANEL

REFERENCE

Control Quadrant

213

76-10-11

PL's Lock Solenoid


FI SOL OVERRIDE
Lighted-Switch
2.

HB17

WOW Microswitch

731

163AL

32-42-28

3.

ZD101

Relays Box

221

221CL

24-58-14

HB51

Relay

PC14

MISCELLANEOUS C/B
Panel

213

24-58-11

KB21

WARN 1 Circuit
Breaker

PC13

BATTERY BUS 1 C/B


Panel

213

24-50-03

QB47

WARNING 1 Circuit
Breaker

4.

5.

Effectivity: See TOC

61-26-00

CONFIG. 1
Pag. 1
Nov. 30/97

CN-235 MAINTENANCE MANUAL


Flight Idle Solenoid Override Circuit - Component Location

CM1.61.26.00.0AO.00.01-00

Fig. 1 Flight Idle Solenoid Override Circuit - Component Location

Effectivity: See TOC

61-26-00

CONFIG. 1
Pag. 2
Nov. 30/97

CN-235 MAINTENANCE MANUAL


3. Description
The Flight Idle Solenoid Override Circuit has the components that follow:
- The PL's lock solenoid, that is part of the control quadrant, ZD133
- The FI SOL OVERRIDE lighted-switch, that is also part of the control
quadrant, ZD133
- The relay HB51 installed in the relays box ZD101
- The WOW microswitch HB17 installed in the rear part of the left main
landing gear.
The 28VDC electrical power supplies to the circuit are:
- from the GEN BUS 1 through the WARN 1 circuit breaker, KB21, installed
on the MISCELLANEOUS circuit breakers panel, PC14
- from the BAT BUS 1 through the WARNING 1 circuit breaker, QB47,
installed
on the BATTERY BUS 1 circuit breakers panel, PC13.
4. Component Description
A.

Control Quadrant, ZD133


The control quadrant, ZD133, has the PL's lock solenoid and the FI
SOL OVERRIDE lighted-switch.
(1) PL's Lock Solenoid
The PL's lock solenoid is installed in the left side of the
control quadrant, ZD133.
The function of the PL's lock solenoid is to prevent the PL's
selection below the FLT IDLE during the aircraft airborne
condition.
When the aircraft is in flight, the PL's lock solenoid receives
28VDC. This 28VDC power supply operates the solenoid that
prevents the accidental setting of the PL's to the GND IDLE or
REV positions.
(2) FI SOL OVERRIDE Lighted-Switch
The FI SOL OVERRIDE lighted-switch is installed on the front
panel of the control quadrant, ZD133. It is a two circuits,
double-throw pushbutton switch with the lighted caption ON.
The function of the FI SOL OVERRIDE lighted-switch is to manually
override the operation of the PL's lock solenoid.

Effectivity: See TOC

61-26-00

CONFIG. 1
Pag. 3
Nov. 30/97

CN-235 MAINTENANCE MANUAL


B.

WOW Microswitch, HB17


The WOW microswitch, HB17, is installed in the rear part of the left
main landing gear.
One circuit of the WOW microswitch, HB17, controls the 28VDC supply
to the PL's lock solenoid through the operation of the relay HB51:
- When the aircraft is in flight, the WOW microswitch, HB17, energizes
the relay, HB51, that connects 28VDC to the PL's lock solenoid
- When the aircraft is on ground, the WOW microswitch, HB17,
de-energizes the relay, HB51, that disconnects the 28VDC from the
PL's lock solenoid.

5. Operation (Fig. 2)
The 28VDC electrical power supplies for the circuit operation are from:
- the GEN BUS 1 through the WARN 1 circuit breaker, KB21
- the BAT BUS 1 through the WARNING 1 circuit breaker, QB47.
When the aircraft is in flight, the WOW microswitch, HB17, closes its
contacts and connects 28VDC to the coil of the relay HB51. Then, the 28VDC
from the WARN 1 circuit breaker are connected to the PL's lock solenoid
through:
- the closed contacts of the operated relay, HB51, and
- the closed contacts of the FI SOL OVERRIDE lighted-switch.
In this aircraft condition, the operated PL's lock solenoid prevents the
accidental setting of the PL's positions below FLT IDLE (GND IDLE or REV).
The PL's lock solenoid operation can be manually and automatically
overridden.
A.

PL's Lock Solenoid Operation Manually Overridden


The FI SOL OVERRIDE lighted-switch overrides the PL's lock solenoid
operation manually. When the FI SOL OVERRIDE lighted-switch is
pushed:
- The lighted caption ON comes on
- The PL's lock solenoid is de-energized.

Effectivity: See TOC

61-26-00

CONFIG. 1
Pag. 4
Nov. 30/97

CN-235 MAINTENANCE MANUAL


B.

PL's Lock Solenoid Operation Automatically Overridden


The operation of the WOW microswitch, HB17, automatically overrides
the PL's lock solenoid operation.
When the aircraft is on ground the WOW microswitch, HB17, opens its
contacts and de-energizes the relay HB51. Then, the relay HB51
removes the 28VDC supplied from the WARN 1 circuit breaker, KB21,
from the PL's lock solenoid.

6. Interfaces (Fig. 2)
The Flight Idle Solenoid Override Circuit has interfaces with the
electrical power distribution systems.
The PL's lock solenoid and the FI SOL OVERRIDE lighted-switch are part of
the control quadrant, ZD133.
One circuit of the WOW microswitch, HB17, installed in the left main
landing gear, controls the PL's lock solenoid operation.

Effectivity: See TOC

61-26-00

CONFIG. 1
Pag. 5
Nov. 30/97

CN-235 MAINTENANCE MANUAL


Flight Idle Solenoid Override Circuit - Operation and Interfaces

CM1.61.26.00.0BO.00.01-00

Fig. 2 Flight Idle Solenoid Override Circuit - Operation and Interfaces

Effectivity: See TOC

61-26-00

CONFIG. 1
Pag. 6
Nov. 30/97

CN-235 MAINTENANCE MANUAL


FLIGHT IDLE SOLENOID OVERRIDE CIRCUIT
DESCRIPTION/OPERATION

1. General
The control quadrant, ZD133, has a solenoid that locks the power levers
(PL's) at the FLT IDLE position. This prevents the accidental operation of
setting the PLs positions below the FLT IDLE when the aircraft is in
flight.
The Flight Idle Solenoid Override Circuit lets the pilot set the PL's
positions below the FLT IDLE in the conditions that follow:
- When the aircraft is on ground, by the automatic operation of the
related weight-on-wheel (WOW) microswitch.
- In landing, immediately after the aircraft touchdown, by the automatic
operation of the reverse control unit. In this condition, the operation
of the related WOW microswitch is possibly not stable.
- When the aircraft is on ground and the related WOW microswitch is
defective, by the manual operation of the FI SOL OVERRIDE
lighted-switch.
2. Component Location (Fig. 1)
ITEM

FIN

1.

ZD133

DESIGNATION

ZONE

ACCESS
PANEL

REFERENCE

Control Quadrant

213

76-10-11

PL's Lock Solenoid


FI SOL OVERRIDE
Lighted-Switch
2.

KB48

Reverse Control Unit

151

251BF

61-26-01

3.

KB49

Relay

151

251AF

24-00-10

** On A/C: POST.SB.235-34-24M, POST.SB.235-76-06/06M-Rev.1, S/N 167167, S/N


170170, S/N 180196, S/N 198999
4.

KB56

Filter Unit

151

251BF

61-26-02

WOW Microswitch

731

163AL

32-42-28

** On A/C: All
5.

HB17

Effectivity: See TOC

61-26-00

CONFIG. 2
Pag. 1
Mar. 01/99

CN-235 MAINTENANCE MANUAL


Flight Idle Solenoid Override Circuit - Component Location

CM1.61.26.00.0AO.00.02-01

Fig. 1 Flight Idle Solenoid Override Circuit - Component Location

Effectivity: See TOC

61-26-00

CONFIG. 2
Pag. 2
Mar. 01/99

CN-235 MAINTENANCE MANUAL


ITEM

FIN

DESIGNATION

ZONE

ACCESS
PANEL

REFERENCE

6.

ZD101

Relays Box

221

221CL

24-58-14

HB51

Relay

PC14

MISCELLANEOUS C/B
Panel

213

24-58-11

KB21

WARN 1 Circuit
Breaker

PC13

BATTERY BUS 1 C/B


Panel

213

24-50-03

QB47

WARNING 1 Circuit
Breaker

7.

8.

3. Description
The Flight Idle Solenoid Override Circuit has the components that follow:
- The PL's lock solenoid, that is part of the control quadrant, ZD133
- The FI SOL OVERRIDE lighted-switch, that is also part of the control
quadrant, ZD133
- The reverse control unit, KB48, installed under the floor of the
passenger compartment, at STA 11232
- The relay, KB49, installed under the floor of the passenger compartment,
at STA 11232
** On A/C: POST.SB.235-34-24M, POST.SB.235-76-06/06M-Rev.1, S/N 167167, S/N
170170, S/N 180196, S/N 198999
- The filter unit, KB56, installed under the floor of the passenger
compartment, at STA 11232
** On A/C: All
- The relay HB51 installed in the relays box ZD101
- The WOW microswitch HB17 installed in the rear part of the left main
landing gear.
The 28VDC electrical power supplies to the circuit are:
- from the GEN BUS 1 through the WARN 1 circuit breaker, KB21, installed
on the MISCELLANEOUS circuit breakers panel, PC14

Effectivity: See TOC

61-26-00

CONFIG. 2
Pag. 3
Mar. 01/99

CN-235 MAINTENANCE MANUAL


- from the BAT BUS 1 through the WARNING 1 circuit breaker, QB47,
installed on the BATTERY BUS 1 circuit breakers panel, PC13.
The circuit also uses different signals received from the Anti-Skid System
for its operation.
4. Component Description
A.

Control Quadrant, ZD133


The control quadrant, ZD133, has the PL's lock solenoid and the FI
SOL OVERRIDE lighted-switch.
(1) PL's Lock Solenoid
The PL's lock solenoid is installed in the left side of the
control quadrant, ZD133.
The function of the PL's lock solenoid is to prevent the PL's
selection below the FLT IDLE during the aircraft airborne
condition.
When the aircraft is in flight, the PL's lock solenoid receives
28VDC. This 28VDC power supply operates the solenoid that
prevents the accidental setting of the PL's to the GND IDLE or
REV positions.
(2) FI SOL OVERRIDE Lighted-Switch
The FI SOL OVERRIDE lighted-switch is installed on the front
panel of the control quadrant, ZD133. It is a two circuits,
double-throw push-button switch with the lighted caption ON.
The function of the FI SOL OVERRIDE lighted-switch is to manually
override the operation of the PL's lock solenoid.

B.

Reverse Control Unit, KB48


(1) Description
The reverse control unit, KB48, is a light aluminum alloy case
with a 19-pin circular electrical connector mounted to one side.
Into the case, the reverse control unit has the logic control
circuits.

Effectivity: See TOC

61-26-00

CONFIG. 2
Pag. 4
Mar. 01/99

CN-235 MAINTENANCE MANUAL


The table that follows shows the functions given to each pin of
the electrical connector:
PIN

FUNCTION

+ 28VDC INPUT

+ 28VDC RETURN

PL'S LOCK-SOLENOID CONTROL-OUTPUT

LEFT-TRANSDUCER READING-INPUT

LEFT-TRANSDUCER READING-INPUT

SPARE

ANTI-SKID SYSTEM INHIBIT INPUT

RIGHT-TRANSDUCER READING-INPUT

RIGHT-TRANSDUCER READING-INPUT

LEFT-TRANSDUCER DC-POLARIZATION LOW-LEVEL

CHASSIS GROUND

V1 OUTPUT

LEFT-TRANSDUCER DC-POLARIZATION HIGH-LEVEL

SHIELD FOR K AND N

RIGHT-TRANSDUCER DC-POLARIZATION LOW-LEVEL

RIGHT-TRANSDUCER DC-POLARIZATION HIGH-LEVEL

SHIELD FOR R AND S

ANTI-SKID SYSTEM OPERATIVE INPUT

POLARIZATION CONTROL-OUTPUT

(2) Operation
The functions of the reverse control unit, KB48, are as follows:
- To automatically override the operation of the PL's lock
solenoid when the wheels turning speed is at or above 550 rpm
immediately after the aircraft touchdown.
- To supply 28VDC to the PL's lock solenoid in all other
conditions different to those given above.
- To supply 28VDC to the Stall Warning Circuit in the take-off
when the wheels turning speed is equal to or more than 550 rpm.

Effectivity: See TOC

61-26-00

CONFIG. 2
Pag. 5
Mar. 01/99

CN-235 MAINTENANCE MANUAL


The reverse control unit, KB48, uses the signals received through
the pins D, E, H and J, to calculate the aircraft speed. These
signals are supplied by the two transducers installed in the rear
wheels of the left and right main landing gears.
The operation of the reverse control unit, KB48, is controlled by
the signals received through the pins G and U. These signals give
the data of the status of the Anti-Skid System operation to the
reverse control unit. Three different statuses can be given
(Ref. 32-42-00, P. Block 1):
(a) Status A. ANTI-SKID switch set to ON and Landing Gear Select
Lever set to DOWN (28VDC at pin U and open circuit at pin
G).
In this condition the reverse control unit, KB48, operates
as follows:
1

It reads the signals received from the rear wheels


transducers through the pins D, E, H and J.

Through the pin C, the reverse control unit supplies:


- 0VDC if the turning speed of one or the two rear
wheels is at or above 550 rpm.
- 28VDC if the turning speed of the two rear wheels is
at or below 530 rpm.

Through the pin M, the reverse control unit supplies:


- 28VDC if the turning speed of one or the two rear
wheels is at or above 550 rpm.
- 0VDC if the turning speed of the two rear wheels is at
or below 530 rpm.

(b) Status B. ANTI-SKID switch set to ON and Landing Gear Select


Lever set to UP (open circuit at pin U and 28VDC at pin G).
In this condition the reverse control unit, KB48, operates
as follows:
1

It does not read the signals received from the rear


wheels transducers.

Through the pin C, the reverse control unit always


supplies 28VDC.

Through the pin M, the reverse control unit always


supplies 0VDC.

Effectivity: See TOC

61-26-00

CONFIG. 2
Pag. 6
Mar. 01/99

CN-235 MAINTENANCE MANUAL


(c) Status C. ANTI-SKID switch set to OFF (open circuit at the
two pins U and G).
In this condition the reverse control unit, KB48, operates
as in the above given Status A and also:

C.

Through the pin V, it supplies 28VDC to operate the


relay KB49.

Through the pins K, N, R and S, the reverse control


unit supplies the necessary DC-polarization signals for
the rear wheels transducers.

Relay, KB49
Through the relay, KB49, the rear wheels transducers receive the
DC-polarization signals.
(1) Relay de-energized: In this condition, the relay, KB49, connects
the DC-polarization outputs from the anti-skid control unit, GB5,
to the related transducers.
(2) Relay energized: In this condition, the relay, KB49, connects the
DC-polarization outputs from the reverse control unit, KB48, to
the related transducers.
The reverse control unit, KB48, controls the operation of the relay,
KB49. The usual operation of the relay is de-energized. The reverse
control unit energizes the relay when one of the conditions that
follow is given:
- The Anti-Skid System is off
- The supply of the DC-polarization signals from the anti-skid control
unit is defective.

** On A/C: POST.SB.235-34-24M, POST.SB.235-76-06/06M-Rev.1, S/N 167167, S/N


170170, S/N 180196, S/N 198999
D.

Filter Unit, KB56


The filter unit, KB56, is a light aluminum alloy case with an
electrical interface connector on one side. Into the case, the unit
has a filter circuit. This filter circuit has three capacitors, KB53,
KB54 and KB55, and one diode, KB52.
The function of the filter unit, KB56, is to prevent the parasitic
currents in the 28VDC power supply line to the reverse control unit,
KB48.

** On A/C: All

Effectivity: See TOC

61-26-00

CONFIG. 2
Pag. 7
Mar. 01/99

CN-235 MAINTENANCE MANUAL


E.

WOW Microswitch, HB17


The WOW microswitch, HB17, is installed in the rear part of the left
main landing gear.
One circuit of the WOW microswitch, HB17, controls the 28VDC supply
to the PL's lock solenoid through the operation of the relay HB51:
- When the aircraft is in flight, the WOW microswitch, HB17, energizes
the relay, HB51, that connects 28VDC to the PL's lock solenoid
- When the aircraft is on ground, the WOW microswitch, HB17,
de-energizes the relay, HB51, that disconnects the 28VDC from the
PL's lock solenoid.

5. Operation (Fig. 2)
The 28VDC electrical power supplies for the circuit operation are from:
- the GEN BUS 1 through the WARN 1 circuit breaker, KB21
- the BAT BUS 1 through the WARNING 1 circuit breaker, QB47.
** On A/C: POST.SB.235-34-24M, POST.SB.235-76-06/06M-Rev.1, S/N 167167, S/N
170170, S/N 180196, S/N 198999
The GEN BUS 1 28VDC supplied to the reverse control unit, KB48, are
filtered by the filter unit, KB56.
** On A/C: All
When the aircraft is in flight, the WOW microswitch, HB17, closes its
contacts and connects 28VDC to the coil of the relay HB51. Then, the 28VDC
output from the reverse control unit, KB48, is connected to the PL's lock
solenoid through:
- the closed contacts of the operated relay, HB51, and
- the closed contacts of the FI SOL OVERRIDE lighted-switch.
In this aircraft condition, the operated PL's lock solenoid prevents the
accidental setting of the PL's positions below FLT IDLE (GND IDLE or REV).

Effectivity: See TOC

61-26-00

CONFIG. 2
Pag. 8
Mar. 01/99

CN-235 MAINTENANCE MANUAL


The PL's lock solenoid operation can be manually and automatically
overridden.
A.

PL's Lock Solenoid Operation Manually Overridden


The FI SOL OVERRIDE lighted-switch overrides the PL's lock solenoid
operation manually. When the FI SOL OVERRIDE lighted-switch is
pushed:
- The lighted caption ON comes on
- The PL's lock solenoid is de-energized.

B.

PL's Lock Solenoid Operation Automatically Overridden


The operation of the reverse control unit, KB48, or the WOW
microswitch, HB17, automatically overrides the PL's lock solenoid
operation.
(1) WOW Microswitch Operation
When the aircraft is on ground, the WOW microswitch, HB17, opens
its contacts and de-energizes the relay HB51. Then, the relay
HB51 removes the 28VDC supplied by the reverse control unit,
KB48, from the PL's lock solenoid.
(2) Reverse Control Unit Operation
In landing, immediately after the aircraft touchdown, the rear
wheels of the left and right main landing gears start to turn
quickly. The reverse control unit, KB48, de-energizes the PL's
lock solenoid when the turning speed of one or the two wheels is
at or above 550 rpm.
The reverse control unit, KB48, calculates the wheels turning
speed from the signals supplied by the left and right transducers
2 and 3, GB13 and GB12.

Effectivity: See TOC

61-26-00

CONFIG. 2
Pag. 9
Mar. 01/99

CN-235 MAINTENANCE MANUAL


Flight Idle Solenoid Override Circuit - Operation and Interfaces

CM1.61.26.00.0BO.01.02-00

Fig. 2 Flight Idle Solenoid Override Circuit - Operation and Interfaces


(Sheet 1 of 2)

Effectivity: See TOC

61-26-00

CONFIG. 2
Pag. 10
Mar. 01/99

CN-235 MAINTENANCE MANUAL

CM1.61.26.00.0BO.02.02-01

Fig. 2 Flight Idle Solenoid Override Circuit - Operation and Interfaces


(Sheet 2 of 2)

Effectivity: See TOC

61-26-00

CONFIG. 2
Pag. 11
Mar. 01/99

CN-235 MAINTENANCE MANUAL


The operation of the reverse control unit, KB48, depends on the
received data of the status of the Anti-Skid System operation.
(a) Status A: ANTI-SKID switch, GB4, set to ON and Landing Gear
(LDG) Select Lever, GA5, at DOWN.
In this condition, the reverse control unit, KB48:
- Reads the signals generated by the rear wheel transducers,
GB13 and GB12.
- Supplies 0VDC to the PL's lock solenoid when the turning
speed of one or the two rear wheels is equal to or more
than 550 rpm. That is, the PL's lock solenoid is
de-energized.
- Supplies 28VDC to the PL's lock solenoid when the turning
speed of the two rear wheels is equal to or less than 530
rpm. In this condition, only the operation of the WOW
microswitch, HB17, or the FI SOL OVERRIDE lighted-switch
can override the PL's lock solenoid operation.
(b) Status B: ANTI-SKID switch, GB4, set to ON and LDG Select
Lever, GA5, at UP.
In this condition, the reverse control unit, KB48:
- Does not read the signals received from the rear wheel
transducers, GB13 and GB12.
- Continuously supplies 28VDC to the PL's lock solenoid.
(c) Status C: ANTI-SKID switch, GB4, set to OFF.
In this condition, the reverse control unit, KB48, operates
as in the Status A above.
The only different is that the anti-skid control unit, GB5,
does not operate. Thus, after 5 seconds trying to read the
transducers signals, the reverse control unit, KB48,
operates as follows:
- Energizes the relay, KB49
- Supplies the DC-polarization signals to the rear wheels
transducers, GB13 and GB12.

Effectivity: See TOC

61-26-00

CONFIG. 2
Pag. 12
Mar. 01/99

CN-235 MAINTENANCE MANUAL


The reverse control unit, KB48, also supplies 28VDC (V1 OUTPUT)
to operate the Angle of Attack/Stall Warning System in the
condition that follows:
- In the above Statuses A and C when the turning speed of one or
the two rear wheels is equal to or more than 550 rpm.
In the Status B, it always supplies 0VDC to the Angle of
Attack/Stall Warning System.
6. Interfaces (Fig. 2)
The Flight Idle Solenoid Override Circuit has interfaces with:
- The electrical power distribution systems
- The Anti-Skid System
- The Angle of Attack/Stall Warning System.
The PL's lock solenoid and the FI SOL OVERRIDE lighted-switch are part of
the control quadrant, ZD133.
One circuit of the WOW microswitch, HB17, installed in the left main
landing gear, controls the PL's lock solenoid operation.

Effectivity: See TOC

61-26-00

CONFIG. 2
Pag. 13
Mar. 01/99

CN-235 MAINTENANCE MANUAL

INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK

Effectivity: See TOC

61-26-00

CONFIG. 2
Pag. 14
Mar. 01/99

CN-235 MAINTENANCE MANUAL


FLIGHT IDLE SOLENOID OVERRIDE CIRCUIT
TROUBLESHOOTING
WARNING:

MAKE SURE THAT THE ELECTRICAL CIRCUITS UPON WHICH WORK IS IN


PROGRESS ARE ISOLATED BEFORE POWER IS SUPPLIED TO THE AIRCRAFT.

1. General
This section has the troubleshooting procedures for the Flight Idle
Solenoid Override Circuit.
Referenced Procedures:
- 24-58-14, P. Block 401
- 32-42-28, P. Block 401
- 76-10-11, P. Block 401
A.

- Relay Box, ZD101 (ZD102)


- WOW Microswitches, GB17 (KE8), HB17 (GB16)
- Control Quadrant, ZD133

Operation of the Circuit in the condition of the aircraft on ground


WITH THE AIRCRAFT ON GROUND AND
THE WARN 1 AND WARNING 1
CIRCUIT BREAKERS, KB21 AND
QB47, CLOSED, THE POWER LEVERS
(PL'S) CAN NOT BE SET BELOW THE
FLT IDLE POSITION.

SUPPORT EQUIPMENT REQUIRED:


- MULTIMETER

IN THE LEFT RELAYS BOX, ZD101,


IS THERE 28VDC AT THE PIN 18 OF
THE CONNECTOR ZD101C-A?

MAKE SURE THAT THE WOW


MICROSWITCH, HB17, IS NOT
PUSHED. REPLACE THE WOW
MICROSWITCH, HB17,
(Ref. 32-42-28, P. Block 401).

YES

NO
REPLACE THE RELAYS BOX, ZD101,
(Ref. 24-58-14, P. Block 401).

Effectivity: See TOC

61-26-00

CONFIG. 1
Pag. 101
Nov. 30/97

CN-235 MAINTENANCE MANUAL


B.

Operation of the Circuit in the condition of the aircraft in flight


Before doing the troubleshooting procedure, do the steps that follow
to simulate the aircraft in flight condition.
(1) Open, safety and tag the L PROP circuit breaker, HB1, on the
MISCELLANEOUS circuit breaker panel, PC14.
(2) At the rear part of the left main landing gear, operate by
pushing the WOW microswitch, HB17, to simulate the aircraft in
flight.
WITH THE WOW MICROSWITCH, HB17,
PUSHED, THE PL'S CAN BE SET
BELOW THE FLT IDLE POSITION.

SUPPORT EQUIPMENT REQUIRED:


- MULTIMETER

ARE THE WARN 1 AND WARNING 1


CIRCUIT BREAKERS, KB21 AND
QB47, OPEN?

CLOSE THE RELATED CIRCUIT


BREAKERS.

YES

NO
ON THE CONTROL QUADRANT, ZD133,
DOES THE FI SOL OVERRIDE
LIGHTED-SWITCH SHOW THE LIGHTED
CAPTION ON?

PUSH THE FI SOL OVERRIDE


LIGHTED-SWITCH.
YES

NO
1 SEE NEXT PAGE

Effectivity: See TOC

61-26-00

CONFIG. 1
Pag. 102
Nov. 30/97

CN-235 MAINTENANCE MANUAL

1 FROM PREVIOUS PAGE


NO
IS THERE 28VDC AT THE PIN f OF
THE CONNECTOR ZD133A?

YES

REPLACE THE CONTROL QUADRANT,


ZD133,
(Ref. 76-10-11, P. Block 401).

NO
MAKE SURE THAT THERE IS 28VDC
AT THE PIN 18 OF THE CONNECTOR
ZD101C-A.

YES

IS THERE NO VOLTAGE?

MAKE SURE THAT THE WOW


MICROSWITCH, HB17, IS PUSHED.
REPLACE THE WOW MICROSWITCH,
HB17,
(Ref. 32-42-28, P. Block 401).

NO
MAKE SURE THAT THERE IS 28VDC
AT THE PIN 20 OF THE CONNECTOR
ZD101D-B.

REPLACE THE RELAYS BOX, ZD101,


(Ref. 24-58-14, P. Block 401).
YES

IS THERE THE VOLTAGE?

NO
REPAIR THE WIRING BETWEEN THE
RELAYS BOX CONNECTOR AND THE
MISCELLANEOUS CIRCUIT BREAKER
PANEL, PC14.

Effectivity: See TOC

61-26-00

CONFIG. 1
Pag. 103
Nov. 30/97

CN-235 MAINTENANCE MANUAL

INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK

Effectivity: See TOC

61-26-00

CONFIG. 1
Pag. 104
Nov. 30/97

CN-235 MAINTENANCE MANUAL


FLIGHT IDLE SOLENOID OVERRIDE CIRCUIT
TROUBLESHOOTING
WARNING:

MAKE SURE THAT THE ELECTRICAL CIRCUITS UPON WHICH WORK IS IN


PROGRESS ARE ISOLATED BEFORE POWER IS SUPPLIED TO THE AIRCRAFT.

1. General
This section has the troubleshooting procedures for the Flight Idle
Solenoid Override Circuit.
Referenced Procedures:
- 24-58-14,
- 32-42-00,
- 32-42-28,
- 61-26-01,
- 76-10-11,
A.

P.
P.
P.
P.
P.

Block
Block
Block
Block
Block

401
1
401
401
401

- Relay Box, ZD101 (ZD102)


- Braking
- WOW Microswitches, GB17 (KE8), HB17 (GB16)
- Reverse Control Unit, KB48
- Control Quadrant, ZD133

Operation of the Circuit in the condition of the aircraft on ground


WITH THE AIRCRAFT ON GROUND AND
THE WARN 1 AND WARNING 1
CIRCUIT BREAKERS, KB21 AND
QB47, CLOSED, THE POWER LEVERS
(PL'S) CAN NOT BE SET BELOW THE
FLT IDLE POSITION.

SUPPORT EQUIPMENT REQUIRED:


- MULTIMETER

IN THE LEFT RELAYS BOX, ZD101,


IS THERE 28VDC AT THE PIN 18 OF
THE CONNECTOR ZD101 c- WAFER A ?

MAKE SURE THAT THE WOW


MICROSWITCH, HB17, IS NOT
PUSHED. REPLACE THE WOW
MICROSWITCH, HB17,
(Ref. 32-42-28, P. Block 401).

YES

NO
REPLACE THE RELAYS BOX, ZD101,
(Ref. 24-58-14, P. Block 401).

Effectivity: See TOC

61-26-00

CONFIG. 2
Pag. 101
Mar. 01/99

CN-235 MAINTENANCE MANUAL


B.

Operation of the Circuit in the condition of the aircraft in flight


Before doing the troubleshooting procedure, do the steps that follow
to simulate the aircraft in flight condition.
(1) Open, safety and tag the L PROP circuit breaker, HB1, on the
MISCELLANEOUS circuit breaker panel, PC14.
(2) At the rear part of the left main landing gear, operate by
pushing the WOW microswitch, HB17, to simulate the aircraft in
flight.
(3) On the center console, make sure that ANTI-SKID switch, GB4, is
set to OFF (Ref. 32-42-00, P. Block 1).
WITH THE WOW MICROSWITCH, HB17,
PUSHED, THE PL'S CAN BE SET
BELOW THE FLT IDLE POSITION.

SUPPORT EQUIPMENT REQUIRED:


- MULTIMETER

ARE THE WARN 1 AND WARNING 1


CIRCUIT BREAKERS, KB21 AND
QB47, OPEN?

CLOSE THE RELATED CIRCUIT


BREAKERS.

YES

NO
ON THE CONTROL QUADRANT, ZD133,
DOES THE FI SOL OVERRIDE
LIGHTED-SWITCH SHOW THE LIGHTED
CAPTION ON?

PUSH THE FI SOL OVERRIDE


LIGHTED-SWITCH.
YES

NO
1 SEE NEXT PAGE

Effectivity: See TOC

61-26-00

CONFIG. 2
Pag. 102
Mar. 01/99

CN-235 MAINTENANCE MANUAL


1 FROM PREVIOUS PAGE
NO
IS THERE 28VDC AT THE PIN t OF
THE CONNECTOR ZD133 a?

YES

REPLACE THE CONTROL QUADRANT,


ZD133,
(Ref. 76-10-11, P. Block 401).

NO
MAKE SURE THAT THERE IS 28VDC
AT THE PIN 18 OF THE CONNECTOR
ZD101 c-WAFER A .

YES

IS THERE NO VOLTAGE?

MAKE SURE THAT THE WOW


MICROSWITCH, HB17, IS PUSHED.
REPLACE THE WOW MICROSWITCH,
HB17,
(Ref. 32-42-28, P. Block 401).

NO
MAKE SURE THAT THERE IS 28VDC
AT THE PIN 20 OF THE CONNECTOR
ZD101 d-WAFER B .

REPLACE THE RELAYS BOX, ZD101,


(Ref. 24-58-14, P. Block 401).
YES

IS THERE THE VOLTAGE?

NO
REPLACE THE REVERSE CONTROL
UNIT, KB48,
(Ref. 61-26-01, P. Block 401).

Effectivity: See TOC

61-26-00

CONFIG. 2
Pag. 103
Mar. 01/99

CN-235 MAINTENANCE MANUAL

INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK

Effectivity: See TOC

61-26-00

CONFIG. 2
Pag. 104
Mar. 01/99

CN-235 MAINTENANCE MANUAL


FLIGHT IDLE SOLENOID OVERRIDE CIRCUIT
ADJUSTMENT/TEST

1. Functional Test of the Flight Idle Solenoid Override Circuit


A.

Reason for the Job


- To make sure that all components of the Flight Idle Solenoid
Override Circuit operate correctly.
- To do the 76.004 MRB task (MRB Document PV01M), "Operational check
of Flight Idle Override Switch by pressing Weight-on-Wheels (WOW)
switch".
- To do the 76.004 MRB task (MRB Document PV01), "Operational check of
locking solenoid by pressing WOW switch".

B.

Equipment and Materials


ITEM
(1)

DESIGNATION
ITEM 20-15-01

Circuit Breaker Safety Clips and Tags

Referenced Procedures:
- 24-40-00, P. Block 201
- 76-10-00, P. Block 1
C.

- External Power
- Power and Condition Control

Procedure
(1) Job Set-Up
(a) Connect the GPU and set the aircraft electrical system to on
(Ref. 24-40-00, P. Block 201) .
(b) Make sure that these circuit breakers are closed:
PANEL

SERVICE

MISCELLANEOUS

WARN 1

KB21

BATTERY BUS 1

WARNING 1

QB47

Effectivity: See TOC

FIN

61-26-00

CONFIG. 1
Pag. 501
Nov. 15/14

CN-235 MAINTENANCE MANUAL


(c) Open, safety and tag, with ITEM 20-15-01, this circuit
breaker:
PANEL

SERVICE

MISCELLANEOUS

L PROP

FIN
HB1

(d) On the control quadrant, ZD133, make sure that the lighted
caption of the FI SOL OVERRIDE lighted-switch is off.
(e) On the control quadrant, ZD133, set the power levers (PL's)
to or above the FLT IDLE position
(Ref. 76-10-00, P. Block 1).
(2) Test
ACTION

RESULT

(a) At the rear part of the left


main landing gear (MLG), push
and hold the WOW microswitch,
HB17, to simulate the
aircraft in flight.

On the control quadrant,


ZD133, the PL's can not be
set below the FLT IDLE
position (that is, to the GND
IDLE or REV positions).

(b) On the control quadrant,


ZD133, push the FI SOL
OVERRIDE lighted-switch.

On the control quadrant,


ZD133:
- The lighted caption ON of
the FI SOL OVERRIDE
lighted-switch comes on
- The PL's can be set to the
GND IDLE and REV positions.

(c) On the control quadrant,


ZD133, set the PL's to or
above the FLT IDLE position.
(d) On the control quadrant,
ZD133, push again the FI SOL
OVERRIDE lighted-switch.

Effectivity: See TOC

The lighted caption ON of the


FI SOL OVERRIDE
lighted-switch goes off.

61-26-00

CONFIG. 1
Pag. 502
Nov. 15/14

ACTION

CN-235 MAINTENANCE MANUAL


RESULT

(e) At the rear part of the left


MLG, release the pushed WOW
microswitch, HB17.

On the control quadrant,


ZD133, the PL's can be set to
the GND IDLE and REV
positions.

(3) Close-Up
(a) Remove the safety clip and tag, ITEM 20-15-01, and close
this circuit breaker:
PANEL

SERVICE

MISCELLANEOUS

L PROP

FIN
HB1

(b) Set the aircraft electrical system to off and disconnect the
GPU (Ref. 24-40-00, P. Block 201) .
(c) Remove all tools and equipment from the work area. Make sure
that the work area is clean.

Effectivity: See TOC

61-26-00

CONFIG. 1
Pag. 503
Nov. 15/14

CN-235 MAINTENANCE MANUAL

INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK

Effectivity: See TOC

61-26-00

CONFIG. 1
Pag. 504
Nov. 15/14

CN-235 MAINTENANCE MANUAL


FLIGHT IDLE SOLENOID OVERRIDE CIRCUIT
ADJUSTMENT/TEST

1. Functional Test of the Flight Idle Solenoid Override Circuit


A.

Reason for the Job


To make sure that all components of the Flight Idle Solenoid Override
Circuit operate correctly.
NOTE:

B.

In this test the hydraulic pumps and the Anti-Skid System


will be operated. Thus, the systems related to these
operations must operate correctly.

Equipment and Materials


ITEM

DESIGNATION

(1)

ITEM 20-15-01

Circuit Breaker Safety Clips and Tags

(2)

ITEM 32-42-07

Spin-Up Test Set

(3)

Standard Tool

Stopwatch

(4)

Standard Tool

Tachometer

Referenced Procedures:
- 24-40-00,
- 29-10-00,
- 32-31-00,
- 32-42-00,
- 32-42-15,
- 76-10-00,
C.

P.
P.
P.
P.
P.
P.

Block
Block
Block
Block
Block
Block

201
1
1
1
401
1

- External Power
- Hydraulic Power - Main System
- Normal Extension and Retraction
- Braking
- Transducer, GB11 (GB10), GB13 (GB12)
- Power and Condition Control

Procedure
(1) Job Set-Up
(a) Connect the GPU and set the aircraft electrical system to on
(Ref. 24-40-00, P. Block 201).

** On A/C: All, except SERIES 300, CL01


(b)

Open, safety clip and tag with ITEM 20-15-01 the circuit
breakers:

Effectivity: See TOC

61-26-00

CONFIG. 2
Pag. 501
Dec. 15/10

CN-235 MAINTENANCE MANUAL


PANEL

SERVICE

FIN

BATTERY BUS 1

LDG GR

GA1

BATTERY BUS 1

FLAPS SYS

CE1

MISCELLANEOUS

L PROP

HB1

(c) Make sure that these circuit breakers are closed:


PANEL

SERVICE

FIN

L MISCELLANEOUS

ANTISKID

GB1

MISCELLANEOUS

WARN 1

KB21

BATTERY BUS 1

WARNING 1

QB47

** On A/C: SERIES 300, CL01


(b) Open, safety clip and tag with ITEM 20-15-01 the circuit
breakers:
PANEL

SERVICE

FIN

BATTERY BUS 1

LDG GR

GA1

BATTERY BUS 1

FLAPS SYS

CE1

(c) Make sure that these circuit breakers are closed:


PANEL

SERVICE

FIN

L MISCELLANEOUS

ANTISKID

GB1

MISCELLANEOUS

WARN 1

KB21

MISCELLANEOUS

L PROP

HB1

** On A/C: All
(d) Make sure that the Landing Gear Control Lever, GA5, is at
the DOWN position (Ref. 32-31-00, P. Block 1).
(e) Make sure that the lighted caption ON of the FI SOL OVERRIDE
lighted-switch is off.

Effectivity: See TOC

61-26-00

CONFIG. 2
Pag. 502
Dec. 15/10

CN-235 MAINTENANCE MANUAL


(f) On the control quadrant, ZD133, set the power levers (PL's)
to or above the FLT IDLE position
(Ref. 76-10-00, P. Block 1).
(g) At the rear part of the left main landing gear (MLG),
operate by pushing the WOW microswitch, HB17, to simulate
the aircraft in flight. Hold the WOW microswitch, HB17,
pushed until specified differently.
(h) In each rear wheel of the two left and right main landing
gears (MLG's) do the steps that follow:
1

Remove the drive cover assembly


(Ref. 32-42-15, P. Block 401).

Install a Spin-Up Test Set ITEM 32-42-07 to the related


transducer rotor.

(2) Test
ACTION

NOTE:

RESULT

Make sure that all the aircraft wheels are stopped before
doing the step (a).

(a) On the center console, set


the ANTISKID switch, GB4,to
the ON position
(Ref. 32-42-00, P. Block 1).
(b) Use the Spin-Up Test Set ITEM
32-42-07 to turn the two
transducer rotors at the
speed of 575 15 rpm.
(c) Set the ANTISKID switch, GB4, - During the first six
to the OFF position.
seconds, the PL's can not be
set below the FLT IDLE
position (that is, to the
GND IDLE or REV positions)
- After the first six seconds,
the PL's can be set to the
GND IDLE and REV positions.
(d) On the control quadrant,
ZD133, set the PL's to or
above the FLT IDLE position.
Effectivity: See TOC

61-26-00

CONFIG. 2
Pag. 503
Dec. 15/10

CN-235 MAINTENANCE MANUAL


RESULT

ACTION

NOTE:

Make sure that all the aircraft wheels are stopped before
doing the step (e).

(e) Set the ANTISKID switch, GB4, - During the first five
to the ON position.
seconds, the PL's can not be
set below the FLT IDLE
position
- After the first five
seconds, the PL's can be set
to the GND IDLE and REV
positions.
(f) Set the PL's to or above the
FLT IDLE position.
NOTE:

Make sure that all the aircraft wheels are stopped before
doing the step (g).

(g) Set to and hold the ANTISKID


switch, GB4, in the TEST
position.

- During the first five


seconds, the PL's can not be
set below the FLT IDLE
position
- After the first five
seconds, the PL's can be set
to the GND IDLE and REV
positions.

(h) Set the PL's to or above the


FLT IDLE position.
NOTE:

Make sure that all the aircraft wheels are stopped before
doing the step (j).

(j) Set the ANTISKID switch, GB4,


to the ON position.
CAUTION:

MAKE SURE THAT THE LDG GR CIRCUIT BREAKER, ON THE


BATTERY BUS 1 CIRCUIT BREAKER PANEL, IS OPEN BEFORE
DOING THE STEP (k).

CAUTION:

MAKE SURE THAT THE TWO HYDRAULIC PUMPS ARE SET TO OFF
BEFORE DOING THE STEP (k) (Ref. 29-10-00, P. Block 1).

Effectivity: See TOC

61-26-00

CONFIG. 2
Pag. 504
Dec. 15/10

ACTION

CN-235 MAINTENANCE MANUAL


RESULT

(k) On the instruments panel, set The PL's can not be set below
the Landing Gear Control
the FLT IDLE position.
Lever, GA5, to the UP
position
(Ref. 32-31-00, P. Block 1).
(l) Set the Landing Gear Control
Lever, GA5, to the DOWN
position.
(m) On the left rear wheel,
decrease the turning speed of
the related transducer rotor
to 500 20 rpm.
(n) Repeat the steps (c) thru
(l).

As in the steps (c) thru (l).

(p) On the left rear wheel:


- Stop the related Spin-Up
Test Set
- Disconnect the related
connector from the
transducer receptacle
(Ref. 32-42-15, P. Block 401
).
(q) Repeat the steps (c) thru
(l).

As in the steps (c) thru (l).

(r) On the left rear wheel:


- Connect the disconnected
connector to the related
transducer receptacle and
put the transducer in its
position
(Ref. 32-42-15, P. Block 401
)
- Use the Spin-Up Test Set
ITEM 32-42-07 to turn the
related transducer rotor at
the speed of 575 15 rpm.
(s) On the right rear wheel,
decrease the turning speed of
the related transducer rotor
to 500 20 rpm.
Effectivity: See TOC

61-26-00

CONFIG. 2
Pag. 505
Dec. 15/10

ACTION

CN-235 MAINTENANCE MANUAL


RESULT

(t) Repeat the steps (c) thru


(l).

As in the steps (c) thru (l).

(u) On the right rear wheel:


- Stop the related Spin-Up
Test Set
- Disconnect the related
connector from the
transducer receptacle
(Ref. 32-42-15, P. Block 401
).
(v) Repeat the steps (c) thru
(l).

As in the steps (c) thru (l).

(w) On the right rear wheel:


- Connect the disconnected
connector to the related
transducer receptacle and
put the transducer in its
position
(Ref. 32-42-15, P. Block 401
)
- Use the Spin-Up Test Set
ITEM 32-42-07 to turn the
related transducer rotor at
the speed of 500 20 rpm.
(x) On the left rear wheel,
decrease the turning speed of
the related transducer rotor
also to 500 20 rpm.
(y) Repeat the steps (c) thru
(l).

The PL's can not be set below


the FLT IDLE position in all
the conditions given in the
steps (c) thru (l).

(z) On the left rear wheel:


- Stop the related Spin-Up
Test Set
- Disconnect the related
connector from the
transducer receptacle
(Ref. 32-42-15, P. Block 401
)
Effectivity: See TOC

61-26-00

CONFIG. 2
Pag. 506
Dec. 15/10

ACTION

CN-235 MAINTENANCE MANUAL


RESULT

(aa) Repeat the steps (c) thru


(l).

The PL's can not be set below


the FLT IDLE position in all
the conditions given in the
steps (c) thru (l).

(ab) On the left rear wheel:


- Connect the disconnected
connector to the related
transducer receptacle and
put the transducer in its
position
(Ref. 32-42-15, P. Block 401
)
- Use the Spin-Up Test Set
ITEM 32-42-07 to turn the
related transducer rotor at
the speed of 500 20 rpm.
(ac) On the right rear wheel:
- Stop the related Spin-Up
Test Set
- Disconnect the related
connector from the
transducer receptacle
(Ref. 32-42-15, P. Block 401
).
(ad) Repeat the steps (c) thru
(l).

The PL's can not be set below


the FLT IDLE position in all
the conditions given in the
steps (c) thru (l).

(ae) On the left rear wheel:


- Stop the related Spin-Up
Test Set
- Disconnect the related
connector from the
transducer receptacle
(Ref. 32-42-15, P. Block 401
).

Effectivity: See TOC

61-26-00

CONFIG. 2
Pag. 507
Dec. 15/10

ACTION

CN-235 MAINTENANCE MANUAL


RESULT

(af) Repeat the steps (c) thru


(l).

The PL's can not be set below


the FLT IDLE position in all
the conditions given in the
steps (c) thru (l).

(ag) Set the ANTISKID switch, GB4,


to the OFF position.
CAUTION:

MAKE SURE THAT THE LDG GR CIRCUIT BREAKER, ON THE


BATTERY BUS 1 CIRCUIT BREAKER PANEL, IS OPEN AND THAT
THE LANDING GEAR CONTROL LEVER, GA5, IS SET TO THE
DOWN POSITION BEFORE SETTING THE HYDRAULIC PUMPS TO
ON.

(ah) Set the two hydraulic pumps,


QC3 and QC4, to on
(Ref. 29-10-00, P. Block 1).

On the control quadrant,


ZD133:
- The PL's can not be set
below the FLT IDLE position
- The PL's lock solenoid has
no movement (no sound is
heard).

(aj) Set the two hydraulic pumps,


QC3 and QC4, to off
(Ref. 29-10-00, P. Block 1).
(ak) On the control quadrant,
ZD133, push the FI SOL
OVERRIDE lighted-switch.

On the control quadrant,


ZD133:
- The lighted caption ON of
the FI SOL OVERRIDE
lighted-switch comes on
- The PL's can be set to the
GND IDLE and REV positions.

(al) On the control quadrant,


ZD133, set the PL's to or
above the FLT IDLE position.
(am) On the control quadrant,
ZD133, push again the FI SOL
OVERRIDE lighted-switch.

Effectivity: See TOC

The lighted caption ON of the


FI SOL OVERRIDE
lighted-switch goes off.

61-26-00

CONFIG. 2
Pag. 508
Dec. 15/10

ACTION

CN-235 MAINTENANCE MANUAL


RESULT

(an) At the rear part of the left


MLG, release the pushed WOW
microswitch, HB17.

On the control quadrant,


ZD133, the PL's can be set to
the GND IDLE and REV
positions.

(3) Close-Up
(a) Remove the Spin-Up Test Set ITEM 32-42-07 from the rotors of
the rear wheel transducers.
(b) Connect the disconnected connectors to the related
transducer receptacles and install the transducers in the
correct positions (Ref. 32-42-15, P. Block 401).
(c) Install the removed drive cover assemblies to the related
MLG rear wheels (Ref. 32-42-15, P. Block 401).
(d) Close the circuit breakers previously opened.
(e) Set the aircraft electrical system to off and disconnect the
GPU (Ref. 24-40-00, P. Block 201).
(f) Make sure that the work area is clean and clear of tools and
miscellaneous equipment.

Effectivity: See TOC

61-26-00

CONFIG. 2
Pag. 509
Dec. 15/10

CN-235 MAINTENANCE MANUAL


2. Operational Check of the Flight Idle Switch
A.

Reason for the Job


To do the 61.26.00.01 MRB task "To do the operational check of the
Flight Idle Override Switch by pressing the Weight on Wheels switch".

B.

Equipment and Materials


ITEM
(1)

DESIGNATION
ITEM 20-15-01

Circuit Breaker Safety Clips and Tags

Referenced Procedures:
- 24-40-00, P. Block 201
- 32-31-00, P. Block 1
- 76-10-00, P. Block 1
C.

- External Power
- Normal Extension and Retraction
- Power and Condition Control

Procedure
(1) Job Set-Up
(a) Connect the GPU and set the aircraft electrical system to on
(Ref. 24-40-00, P. Block 201).

** On A/C: All, except SERIES 300, CL01


(b) Open, safety clip and tag with ITEM 20-15-01 the circuit
breaker:
PANEL

SERVICE

MISCELLANEOUS

L PROP

FIN
HB1

(c) Make sure that the these circuit breakers are closed:
PANEL

SERVICE

L MISCELLANEOUS

ANTISKID

GB1

MISCELLANEOUS

WARN 1

KB21

BATTERY BUS 1

WARNING 1

QB47

Effectivity: See TOC

FIN

61-26-00

CONFIG. 2
Pag. 510
Dec. 15/10

CN-235 MAINTENANCE MANUAL


(d) Make sure that the Landing Gear Control Lever, GA5, is at
the DOWN position (Ref. 32-31-00, P. Block 1).
(e) Make sure that the lighted caption ON of the FI SOL OVERRIDE
lighted-switch is off.
(f) On the control quadrant, ZD133, set the power levers (PL's)
above the FLT IDLE position (Ref. 76-10-00, P. Block 1).
(g) At the rear part of the left main landing gear (MLG),
operate by pushing the WOW microswitch, HB17, to simulate
the aircraft in flight. Hold the WOW microswitch, HB17,
pushed until specified differently.
(h) Make sure that the ANTISKID switch, GB4, is set to OFF.
** On A/C: SERIES 300, CL01
(b) Make sure that the these circuit breakers are closed:
PANEL

SERVICE

FIN

L MISCELLANEOUS

ANTISKID

GB1

MISCELLANEOUS

WARN 1

KB21

MISCELLANEOUS

L PROP

HB1

(c) Make sure that the Landing Gear Control Lever, GA5, is at
the DOWN position (Ref. 32-31-00, P. Block 1).
(d) Make sure that the lighted caption ON of the FI SOL OVERRIDE
lighted-switch is off.
(e) On the control quadrant, ZD133, set the power levers (PL's)
above the FLT IDLE position (Ref. 76-10-00, P. Block 1).
(f) At the rear part of the left main landing gear (MLG),
operate by pushing the WOW microswitch, HB17, to simulate
the aircraft in flight. Hold the WOW microswitch, HB17,
pushed until specified differently.
(g) Make sure that the ANTISKID switch, GB4, is set to OFF.
** On A/C: All
(2) Operational Check

Effectivity: See TOC

61-26-00

CONFIG. 2
Pag. 511
Dec. 15/10

CN-235 MAINTENANCE MANUAL


ACTION

RESULT

(a) On the control quadrant,


ZD133, move the PL's below
the FI position.

The PL's can not be set below


the FLT IDLE position

(b) On the control quadrant,


ZD133, push the FI SOL
OVERRIDE lighted-switch.

On the control quadrant,


ZD133:
- The lighted caption ON of
the FI SOL OVERRIDE
lighted-switch comes on
- The PL's can be set to the
GND IDLE and REV positions.

(c) On the control quadrant,


ZD133, set the PL's above the
FLT IDLE position.
(d) On the control quadrant,
ZD133, push again the FI SOL
OVERRIDE lighted-switch.

The lighted caption ON of the


FI SOL OVERRIDE
lighted-switch goes off.
The PL's can not be set below
the FLT IDLE position

(e) At the rear part of the left


MLG, release the pushed WOW
microswitch, HB17.

On the control quadrant,


ZD133, the PL's can be set to
the GND IDLE and REV
positions.

(3) Close Up
(a) Set the aircraft electrical system to off and disconnect the
GPU (Ref. 24-40-00, P. Block 201).
** On A/C: All, except SERIES 300, CL01
(b) Close the circuit breakers previously opened.
(c) Remove all tools and equipment from the work area. Make sure
that the work area is clean.
** On A/C: SERIES 300, CL01
(b) Remove all tools and equipment from the work area. Make sure
that the work area is clean.

Effectivity: See TOC

61-26-00

CONFIG. 2
Pag. 512
Dec. 15/10

CN-235 MAINTENANCE MANUAL


REVERSE CONTROL UNIT,

KB48

REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
WARNING:

MAKE SURE THAT ELECTRICAL CIRCUITS UPON WHICH WORK IS IN PROGRESS


ARE ISOLATED. ENERGIZED CIRCUITS CAN CAUSE INJURY TO PERSONS.

1. Reason for the Job


To remove and install the reverse control unit, KB48, for maintenance
purposes or when its operation is defective.
2. Equipment and Materials
ITEM

DESIGNATION

A.

ITEM 20-15-01

Circuit Breaker Safety Clips and Tags

B.

Blanking Plugs and Caps

Referenced Procedures:
- 32-42-00,
- 32-12-10,
- 53-24-20,
- 61-26-00,

P.
P.
P.
P.

Block
Block
Block
Block

1
501
401
501

- Braking
- Angle of Attack/Stall Warning System
- Center Fuselage Floor Panels
- Flight Idle Solenoid Override Circuit

3. Procedure
A.

Job Set-Up
(1) Make sure that the ANTISKID switch, GB4, is set to OFF
(Ref. 32-42-00, P. Block 1).
(2) Open, safety and tag the circuit breakers that follow:
PANEL

SERVICE

FIN

MISCELLANEOUS

WARN 1

KB21

L MISCELLANEOUS

ANTISKID

GB1

(3) Remove the floor panel 251BF to get access to the reverse control
unit (Ref. 53-24-20, P. Block 401).

Effectivity: See TOC

61-26-01

CONFIG. 1
Pag. 401
Jun. 30/02

CN-235 MAINTENANCE MANUAL


B.

Removal (Fig. 401)


(1) Disconnect the connector (3) from the receptacle (2).
(2) Install blanking plug and cap to the connector (3) and the
receptacle (2).
(3) Hold the reverse control unit (1) and remove the four screws (6)
and the washers (5).
(4) Remove the reverse control unit (1) from the work area.

C.

Preparation for Installation (Fig. 401)


(1) Remove blanking plug and cap from the connector (3) and
receptacle (2). Examine them for signs of damage.
(2) Examine the supports (4) for signs of damage and corrosion. Make
sure that the ground points on the related supports (4) are
clean.

D.

Installation (Fig. 401)


(1) Put the reverse control unit (1) in position on the supports (4)
and attach it with the four washers (5) and the screws (6).
Tighten the screws (6).
(2) Connect the connector (3) to the receptacle (2).

E.

Test
(1) Do adjustment/test procedure (Ref. 61-26-00, P. Block 501).
(2) Do the related part of the adjustment/test procedure of the Angle
of Attack/Stall Warning System (Ref. 34-12-00, P. Block 501).

F.

Close-Up
(1) Make sure that the work area is clean and clear of tools and
miscellaneous equipment.
(2) Install the removed floor panel (Ref. 53-24-20, P. Block 401).

Effectivity: See TOC

61-26-01

CONFIG. 1
Pag. 402
Jun. 30/02

CN-235 MAINTENANCE MANUAL


Reverse Control Unit, KB48

CM1.61.26.01.4AO.00.01-00

Fig. 401 Reverse Control Unit, KB48

Effectivity:

TOC

61-26-01

CONFIG. 1
Pag. 403
Jun. 30/02

CN-235 MAINTENANCE MANUAL

INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK

Effectivity: See TOC

61-26-01

CONFIG. 1
Pag. 404
Jun. 30/02

CN-235 MAINTENANCE MANUAL


FILTER UNIT,

KB56

REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
WARNING:

MAKE SURE THAT ELECTRICAL CIRCUITS UPON WHICH WORK IS IN PROGRESS


ARE ISOLATED. ENERGIZED CIRCUITS CAN CAUSE INJURY TO PERSONS.

1. Reason for the Job


To remove and install the filter unit, KB56, for maintenance purposes or
when its operation is defective.
2. Equipment and Materials
ITEM

DESIGNATION

A.

ITEM 20-15-01

Circuit Breaker Safety Clips and Tags

B.

Blanking Plugs and Caps

Referenced Procedures:
- 53-24-20, P. Block 401
- 61-26-00, P. Block 501

- Center Fuselage Floor Panels


- Flight Idle Solenoid Override Circuit

3. Procedure
A.

Job Set-Up
(1) Open, safety and tag the circuit breaker that follows:
PANEL

SERVICE

MISCELLANEOUS

WARN 1

FIN
KB21

(2) Remove the floor panel 251BF to get access to the filter unit
(Ref. 53-24-20, P. Block 401).

Effectivity: See TOC

61-26-02

Pag. 401
Mar. 31/00

CN-235 MAINTENANCE MANUAL


B.

Removal (Fig. 401)


(1) Disconnect the connector (2) from the receptacle (3).
(2) Install blanking plug and cap to the connector (2) and the
receptacle (3).
(3) Hold the filter unit (4) and remove the four screws (5) and the
washers (6).
(4) Remove the filter unit (4) from the work area.

C.

Preparation for Installation (Fig. 401)


(1) Remove blanking plug and cap from the connector (2) and
receptacle (3). Examine them for signs of damage.
(2) Examine the installation area on the partition wall (1) for signs
of damage and corrosion. Make sure that the ground points on the
installation area are clean.

D.

Installation (Fig. 401)


(1) Put the filter unit (4) in position on the partition wall (1) and
attach it with the four washers (6) and the screws (5). Tighten
the screws (5).
(2) Connect the connector (2) to the receptacle (3).

E.

Test
(1) Do adjustment/test procedure (Ref. 61-26-00, P. Block 501).

F.

Close-Up
(1) Make sure that the work area is clean and clear of tools and
miscellaneous equipment.
(2) Install the removed floor panel (Ref. 53-24-20, P. Block 401).

Effectivity: See TOC

61-26-02

Pag. 402
Mar. 31/00

CN-235 MAINTENANCE MANUAL


Filter Unit, KB56

CM1.61.26.02.4AO.00.00-00

Fig. 401 Filter Unit, KB56

Effectivity:

TOC

61-26-02

Pag. 403
Mar. 31/00

CN-235 MAINTENANCE MANUAL

INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK

Effectivity: See TOC

61-26-02

Pag. 404
Mar. 31/00

CN-235 MAINTENANCE MANUAL


BRAKING
DESCRIPTION/OPERATION

1. General
The propeller brake unit is installed on the RH engine only. Its purpose
is to let the engine be used as an Auxiliary Power Unit (APU) during
ground operations giving electrical and bleed services for the aircraft
Environmental Control System (ECS) without danger from a turning
propeller.

Effectivity: See TOC

61-30-00

Pag. 1
Jul. 31/93

CN-235 MAINTENANCE MANUAL

INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK

Effectivity: See TOC

61-30-00

Pag. 2
Jul. 31/93

CN-235 MAINTENANCE MANUAL


PROPELLER BRAKE SYSTEM
DESCRIPTION/OPERATION

1. General
The propeller of the RH engine can be prevented from turning, when the
aircraft is on the ground, to let the engine be used as an auxiliary power
unit (APU). The propeller is locked in a stationary position by a
hydraulically operated brake unit installed on the propeller gearbox
assembly.
The system includes protective devices to make sure that the brake system
cannot be operated when the aircraft is in flight.
2. Component Location (Fig. 1)
ITEM

FIN

DESIGNATION

ZONE

ACCESS
PANEL

REFERENCE

Hydraulic Propeller
Brake Control Valve

932

932AT

61-31-11

Hydraulic Propeller
Brake Control Valve

932

931AT

61-31-11

Power Brake Unit

422

422AL

61-31-14

Pressure Switch

932

932AT

61-31-13

Pressure Switch

932

931AT

61-31-13

** On A/C: S/N 001062


1.

KE1

** On A/C: S/N 063163, 165178, 180196, 198999


1.

KE1

** On A/C: All
2.

** On A/C: S/N 001062


3.

KE11
(KE12)

** On A/C: S/N 063163, 165178, 180196, 198999


3.

KE11
(KE12)

** On A/C: All
4.

Quick Disconnect
Couplings

422

422AL

61-31-12

5.

ZD133

Control Quadrant

213

76-10-11

Effectivity: See TOC

61-31-00

CONFIG. 1
Pag. 1
Jun. 01/99

CN-235 MAINTENANCE MANUAL


Propeller Brake System

CM1.61.31.00.0AO.01.01-00

Fig. 1 Propeller Brake System (Sheet 1 of 2)

Effectivity: See TOC

61-31-00

CONFIG. 1
Pag. 2
Jun. 01/99

CN-235 MAINTENANCE MANUAL

CM1.61.31.00.0AO.02.01-00

Fig. 1 Propeller Brake System (Sheet 2 of 2)

Effectivity: See TOC

61-31-00

CONFIG. 1
Pag. 3
Jun. 01/99

CN-235 MAINTENANCE MANUAL


ITEM

FIN

DESIGNATION

ZONE

ACCESS
PANEL

REFERENCE

6.

WB8

RH Fire Lever

212

26-21-14

7.

ZD137

RH Relays Box

222

222CR

24-58-13

KE10

Relay

8.

ZD127

HYDR UTILITY
Control Unit

212

52.31.11

9.

KE8

Weight-on-Wheels
Microswitch

741

164BR

32-42-28

10.

PC8

R MISCELLANEOUS
Circuit Breakers
Panel

222

24-58-15

KE1

WARN Circuit Breaker

KE2

PROP BRAKE Circuit


Breaker

3. Description
A.

Electrical System
The propeller brake system can only be operated to stop the propeller
turning under the following conditions:
(1) Condition lever - Feathered position, FEATHER
(2) Power lever - Ground Idle position, GND IDLE
(3) Gust Lock microswitch - On-Lock applied
(4) Weight-on-wheels microswitch - Aircraft on Ground
(5) Propeller Brake - To Push
The system is controlled by switch, KE3, installed on the HYDR
UTILITY control unit, ZD127, on the flight compartment overhead
panel.
The caption in the operating CONT switch, KE3, is divided to show ON
and BRAKE. The ON caption comes on as the switch is operated showing
that electrical power to the system is available and that the system
has been set to on. The BRAKE caption comes on to show that the
hydraulic operating pressure is sufficient and that pressure has been
applied to the brake calipers.

Effectivity: See TOC

61-31-00

CONFIG. 1
Pag. 4
Jun. 01/99

CN-235 MAINTENANCE MANUAL


A LOW PRESS IND lighted indicator, KE4, is installed on the control
unit ZD127 and comes on to show a warning #1 or #2 caption indicating
a failure of hydraulic pressure in either line from the hydraulic
propeller brake control valve.
Installed in the lines to each caliper are pressure switches KE11,
KE12, connected through the CONT switch, KE3, to the central warning
panel (CWP) system (Ref. 31-51-00, P. Block 1). Should any pressure
remain in the lines after the system has been switched off, a circuit
is completed through the relevant pressure switch and the CONT
switch, KE3, to operate the CWP system and cause a PROP BRAKE caption
to come on in the red warning CWP, showing that the propeller brake
is still applied even though the system has been set to off.
B.

Hydraulic System
The propeller hydraulic brake system is made up of a power brake
unit, a hydraulic propeller brake control valve, pipelines and
quick-disconnect coupling hoses.
The power brake unit is installed on the RH engine propeller gearbox
and is connected by two flexible hoses to the system rigid pipelines.
The connections are made with two quick-disconnect couplings
installed on the RH engine support frame. The pipelines are led along
the support frame to the front face of the center wing front spar and
then inboard to connect with the hydraulic propeller brake control
valve.
The hydraulic propeller brake control valve has:
- Two ports: a pressure input with a restrictor and a return output
with a check valve, both connected to the general hydraulic system
- Two check valves with bypass
- Two thermal relief valves
- Two control valves activated by solenoids (ON solenoid to put the
brake on and OFF solenoid to put the brake off)
- Two compensators which operate two pressure switches, P1 and P2
- Two outputs which connect each line to the associated pistons in the
brake unit.
Installed in the pipeline system in the rear bay are two pressure
switches which give warning of any pressure remaining in the lines
after the system is set to OFF.
The hydraulic propeller brake control valve is supplied with fluid
from the main hydraulic system at a pressure of 3000 psi (211 Kg/cm 2)
and has two bleed points for servicing purposes.

Effectivity: See TOC

61-31-00

CONFIG. 1
Pag. 5
Jun. 01/99

CN-235 MAINTENANCE MANUAL


4. Component Description
A.

Hydraulic Propeller Brake Control Valve, KE1 (Fig. 2)


The unit has two identical solenoid operated valves (3), (6)
installed as a complete manifold assembly.
Installed in the manifold are two thermal relief valves, two check
valves with bypass, pressure inlet restrictor (2), return line check
valve (7), two servicing ports (8), (9) and an electrical receptacle
(10) for power supply connection to solenoids. Two fluid displacement
pressure compensators (one for each service line) are also installed
in the manifold. The compensators operate pressure switches P1 and P2
at an increasing pressure of 2650 psi (185,5 Kg/cm 2) maximum, causing
the BRAKE caption in CONT switch, KE3, to come on and to go off at a
decreasing pressure of 2350 psi (164,5 Kg/cm 2).
The solenoids (4), (5) are energized to open and close valves (3),
(6) as selected by CONT switch, KE3, on the HYDR UTILITY control
unit, ZD127.
Pressure fluid from the service ports (8), (9) is led to the
respective brake caliper.
For installation purposes, the unit has four attachment lugs (1).

B.

Power Brake Unit (Fig. 3)


The unit is a twin caliper (1), disk type brake manifold, with
hydraulically operated piston brake pads (4), (6). The pistons
self-adjusting and are spring loaded to release the brake disk
hydraulic pressure is removed. Servicing bleed points (2), (3)
installed on each caliper.

two
are
when
are

The unit is installed on the front RH side of the RH engine propeller


gearbox with four attaching bolts (5).
C.

Pressure Switch, KE11 (KE12)


The pressure switch operates to come ON at an increasing pressure of
100 psi (7 kg/cm 2) and go OFF at a decreasing pressure of 80 5 psi
(5,6 3,5 kg/cm 2).
If pressure remains in either line to the brake calipers with the
system set to OFF, the relevant pressure switch completes a circuit
through the CONT switch, KE3, and the PROP BRAKE warning caption on
the CWP comes on. When the decreasing pressure is below 80 psi, the
PROP BRAKE caption goes off.

Effectivity: See TOC

61-31-00

CONFIG. 1
Pag. 6
Jun. 01/99

CN-235 MAINTENANCE MANUAL


Hydraulic Propeller Brake Control Valve

CM1.61.31.00.0BO.00.01-00

Fig. 2 Hydraulic Propeller Brake Control Valve

Effectivity: See TOC

61-31-00

CONFIG. 1
Pag. 7
Jun. 01/99

CN-235 MAINTENANCE MANUAL


Power Brake Unit

CM1.61.31.00.0CO.00.01-00

Fig. 3 Power Brake Unit


Quick-Disconnect Coupling

CM1.61.31.00.0DO.00.01-00

Fig. 4 Quick-Disconnect Coupling

Effectivity: See TOC

61-31-00

CONFIG. 1
Pag. 8
Jun. 01/99

CN-235 MAINTENANCE MANUAL


D.

Quick-Disconnect Couplings (Fig. 4)


The stainless steel couplings interface between the power brake unit
flexible hoses and the system rigid pipelines. The couplings are
installed on the RH engine left front support frame.
To disconnect the half-couplings, pull the coupling sleeve (2) to
release the ratchets and then turn to separate the coupling. To
connect, engage the male coupling (3) with the female coupling (1)
and turn sleeve (2) until ratchet teeth are fully meshed.

E.

Control Quadrant, ZD133


Installed on the control quadrant and operated by relevant control
levers are the following microswitches:
(1)

Ground Idle, PMT S4

(2)

Gust Lock, S15

(3)

Feather, S5.

The switches must all be in the closed position before the propeller
brake system can be operated.
F.

RH Fire Lever, WB8


Installed on the FIRE SYSTEM control unit ZD123, the fire lever, WB8,
when operated, completes a circuit to the OFF solenoid in the Power
Brake Unit to release the propeller brake should it be necessary to
operate the fire lever (WB8) to extinguish a fire in the RH engine.
Turning the fire lever also isolates electrical power to the
remainder of the brake system to make sure that the brake is released
and that the propeller is free to turn.

G.

HYDR UTILITY Control Unit, ZD127


The HYDR UTILITY control unit, ZD127, installed on the overhead panel
in the flight compartment, has propeller brake CONT switch, KE3,
which has two divided lighted captions (BRAKE and ON), and a LOW
PRESS IND lighted warning indicator, KE4, which has a warning light
for each brake caliper pressure line (#1 and #2).

H.

Weight-on-Wheels Switch, KE8


Installed on the front leg of RH landing gear, the switch isolates
the circuit to make sure that the propeller brake system cannot be
operated in flight.

Effectivity: See TOC

61-31-00

CONFIG. 1
Pag. 9
Jun. 01/99

CN-235 MAINTENANCE MANUAL


5. Operation
A.

Electrical Circuit Operation (Fig. 5)


(1) Power Supplies - System set to OFF
From BAT BUS 2, through 5A PROP BRAKE circuit breaker, KE2, power
is supplied to the pole contact NC in the RH fire lever, WB8.
From pole contact NC, power is supplied, through CONT switch,
KE3, to the OFF solenoid in the hydraulic propeller brake control
valve, KE1. The OFF solenoid is energized to make sure that
hydraulic pressure is released from the power brake unit. If the
RH fire lever, WB8, is operated, pole contact NC changes its
position and power is supplied direct to energize the OFF
solenoid and release the propeller brake.
At the same time, power is supplied from BAT BUS 2, through 1A
WARN circuit breaker, KE1, to the pole contact NO in the RH fire
lever, WB8.
From pole contact NO, power is supplied through relay KE10 in
relays box ZD137, to the lower open contacts in CONT switch, KE3
(potential waiting). Also from relay KE10 power is supplied to
the pressure switches KE11 (KE12) and to lower center contact
pole in CONT switch, KE3 (Potential waiting for switches
changeover).
(2) Circuit Operation - System set to ON
Pushing button of CONT switch, KE3, removes power supply from the
OFF solenoid of hydraulic propeller brake control valve, KE1, and
supplies power to the ON caption light in CONT switch, KE3. At
the same time, the power is supplied to the center console
control quadrant, ZD133, through Feather and Gust Lock switches
to the Weight-on-Wheels microswitch, KE8, in the RH main landing
gear (in GND setting). From switch, KE8, power is supplied to the
lower contact of relay, KE10, in relays box ZD137. From the lower
contact in relay, KE10, power is supplied to the Ground Idle
switch in control quadrant ZD133 and back to relay KE10, which
energizes to "hold-on" relay, KE10, in the propeller brake ON
selection. At this moment, the relay KE10 remains locked in, and
is energized directly from the weight-on-wheels microswitch KE8.
Now, the RH PL can change position as required. At the same time,
the Ground Idle switch, through the relay KE10, supplies power to
the ON solenoid in the hydraulic propeller brake control valve,
KE1.

Effectivity: See TOC

61-31-00

CONFIG. 1
Pag. 10
Jun. 01/99

CN-235 MAINTENANCE MANUAL


NOTE:

The series connected microswitches, Feather, Gust Lock,


Ground Idle and Weight-on-Wheels make sure that the
propeller brake cannot be applied until all required
conditions are met.

** On A/C: SERIES 10
The action of the CONT switch, KE3 to the ON position, closes a
circuit to inhibit the operation of the engine anti-icing
circuit.
** On A/C: All
As the ON solenoid operates, hydraulic pressure is applied to the
brake calipers to stop the propeller turning. Pressure switches
P1 and P2 in the hydraulic propeller brake control unit, KE1,
changeover and supply power from the lower pole contact in CONT
switch, KE3, to the BRAKE caption in switch, KE3, to show that
propeller brake has been applied.
(3) Defect Indication - System set to ON
If there is a pressure failure in either brake line, the
respective pressure switch, P1 or P2, fails to operate and the
potential is supplied to the appropriate caption in the LOW PRESS
IND failure indicator, KE4.
This potential is passed through the relevant KE5 (KE6) diode,
through the closed second contacts of CONT switch, KE3, to
operate the central warning system and cause a "PROP BRAKE"
caption to come on in the red CWP annunciator in the flight
compartment. This indication is accompanied by visual and audio
attention alarms.
(4) Defect Indications - System set to OFF
With CONT switch, KE3, set to OFF, the system is designed to
release the hydraulic pressure in the propeller brake calipers.
If pressure remains in either hydraulic line, a pressure switch
KE11 (KE12) will remain in the operated condition completing a
feed from relay, KE10, through the contacts of the relevant
pressure switch to the closed second contacts of CONT switch,
KE3, to apply a signal to the central warning system. This causes
a PROP BRAKE caption to come on in the red CWP annunciator
accompanied by visual and audio attention alarms.

Effectivity: See TOC

61-31-00

CONFIG. 1
Pag. 11
Jun. 01/99

CN-235 MAINTENANCE MANUAL


Propeller Brake Circuit

CM1.61.31.00.0EO.00.01-00

Fig. 5 Propeller Brake Circuit

Effectivity: Series 10

61-31-00

CONFIG. 1
Pag. 12
Jun. 01/99

CN-235 MAINTENANCE MANUAL

CM1.61.31.00.0EA.00.01-00

Propeller Brake Circuit


Fig. 5A Propeller Brake Circuit

Effectivity: Series 100

61-31-00

CONFIG. 1
Pag. 13
Jun. 01/99

CN-235 MAINTENANCE MANUAL


B.

Hydraulic System Operation (Fig. 5) and (Fig. 6)


The propeller brake hydraulic system uses fluid pressure from the
main hydraulic power system. At least a hydraulic pump must be
operating while the brake is on, to make sure that a pressure of 3000
psi is present at the inlet port restrictor (11) of the hydraulic
propeller brake control valve (5).
(1) Propeller Brake ON
Setting the CONT switch, KE3, to the ON position supplies power
to the ON solenoid (8) to open valve (9). Fluid pressure from
restrictor (11) now passes through the valve (9), through
pressure line lock valves (7) and (14) to act on two fluid
displacement compensators (4) and (16) which open to let fluid
pressure pass to the pressure ports and then to the brake caliper
units (1) and (19). Pressure switches (3) and (17) operated by
the compensators (4) and (16) complete a circuit to the CONT
switch, KE3, BRAKE caption which comes on.
If there is a system malfunction, or operating pressure is too
low in one or both pressure service lines, the relevant pressure
switch (2) or (18) does not operate. This condition causes the
low pressure failure indicator LOW PRESS IND, KE4, to come on. In
the event of a pressure rise in the system, due to thermal
expansion (BRAKE ON), excess pressure is relieved through the
thermal relief valve (6) and (15) to the main hydraulic power
return line through the OFF valve (12).
If one of these conditions, CL on START, Gust Lock in locked
position or weight-on-wheels, is inadvertently removed with the
CONT switch, KE3, in ON position, the relay KE10 is desenergized
and its two contacts change the position. One of them opens
desenergizing the ON solenoid valve (8), which changes its
position, and the other closes, and lets the current pass to PROP
BRAKE caption which comes on.
However, the brake is not released immediately, since the two
check valves (7) and (14), and the two compensators (4) and (16)
prevent possible leaks in the system during certain time. After
an indeterminate time, these leaks would decrease the pressure
and the propeller would begin to turn. This operation is
absolutely incorrect.
By the same reasons, the propeller stays stopped although the
hydraulic pump is inadvertently disconnected or the pressure
supply is cut off due to failure.

Effectivity: See TOC

61-31-00

CONFIG. 1
Pag. 14
Jun. 01/99

CN-235 MAINTENANCE MANUAL


Propeller Hydraulic Brake System - Schematic (RH Propeller only)

CM1.61.31.00.0FO.00.01-00

Fig. 6 Propeller Hydraulic Brake System - Schematic (RH Propeller only)

Effectivity: See TOC

61-31-00

CONFIG. 1
Pag. 15
Jun. 01/99

CN-235 MAINTENANCE MANUAL


(2) Propeller Brake OFF
Setting switch CONT, KE3, to the OFF position removes the power
supply to the ON solenoid (8), and valve (9) closes to isolate
fluid pressure from the system and connects the pressure lines to
the return line. At the same time, power is supplied to the OFF
solenoid (13) to open the return valve (12) and relieve fluid
pressure back to the main hydraulic power return line through
check valve (10).
As the pressure decreases, the brake calipers (1), (19) are
released and the compensator pressure switches (3), (17) and line
pressure switches (2), (18) are operated to indicate that the
propeller brake system is OFF. If one, or both pressure lines
remain under pressure with the system set to OFF, the relevant
switch (2) or (18) will remain in the operated condition. In this
condition, the PROP BRAKE warning caption comes on in the CWP
accompanied by audio and visual attention alarms.
6. Interfaces
The propeller brake system interfaces with the following systems or
subsystems:
- Main Hydraulic Power (Ref. 29-10-00, P. Block 1)
- Flight Warning System (Ref. 31-51-00, P. Block 1)
** On A/C: Series 10
- Engine Anti-Icing (Ref. 75-10-00, P. Block 1)
** On A/C: All

Effectivity: See TOC

61-31-00

CONFIG. 1
Pag. 16
Jun. 01/99

CN-235 MAINTENANCE MANUAL


PROPELLER BRAKE SYSTEM
TROUBLESHOOTING

1. General
This section contains troubleshooting procedures for the propeller brake
system.
A.
PROPELLER BRAKE HEAD ASSEMBLY
INOPERATIVE WITH SYSTEM
SELECTED ON.

SUPPORT EQUIPMENT REQUIRED


- GROUND POWER UNIT
- MULTIMETER

OBSERVE MAIN HYDRAULIC PRESSURE


GAGE.

SET MAIN HYDRAULIC SYSTEM TO


NORMAL OPERATING PRESSURE
(Ref. 29-10-00, P. Block 1).

YES

IS PRESSURE LOW?
NO
OBSERVE PROP BRAKE CIRCUIT
BREAKER, KE2, ON R
MISCELLANEOUS PANEL, PC8.

YES

INVESTIGATE CAUSES ABOUT


CIRCUIT BREAKER IS OPENED
BEFORE CLOSING IT.

IS CIRCUIT BREAKER OPEN?

NO
OBSERVE POSITION OF RH FIRE
LEVER, WB8, ON OVERHEAD PANEL.

PUSH LEVER FULLY IN.


YES

IS LEVER PULLED?
NO
1

Effectivity: See TOC

SEE NEXT PAGE

61-31-00

CONFIG. 1
Pag. 101
Jul. 01/98

CN-235 MAINTENANCE MANUAL


1

FROM PREVIOUS PAGE

NO
OBSERVE POSITION OF RH POWER
AND CONDITION LEVERS AND GUST
LOCK LEVER ON CENTRAL CONTROL
QUADRANT
(Ref. 61-31-00, P. Block 501)

SET LEVERS TO CORRECT POSITIONS


(Ref. 61-31-00, P. Block 501).
YES

ARE LEVERS INCORRECTLY SET?


NO
INSPECT BRAKE HEAD ASSEMBLY FOR
FLUID LEAKAGE AND EXCESSIVE PAD
WEAR.

YES

REPAIR OR REPLACE BRAKE HEAD


ASSEMBLY
(Ref. 61-31-14, P. Block 401).

ANY FAULT FOUND?


NO
DISCONNECT CONNECTOR KE1a AT
HYDRAULIC BRAKE CONTROL VALVE,
KE1,
(Ref. 61-31-11, P. Block 401).
DO TEST FOR POWER SUPPLY AT PIN
A ON CONNECTOR.

REPLACE HYDRAULIC BRAKE CONTROL


VALVE
(Ref. 61-31-11, P. Block 401).
YES

IS POWER SUPPLY AVAILABLE?


NO
OBSERVE "PROP BRAKE" CAPTION ON
CENTRAL WARNING PANEL.

YES

RELAY KE10 IS SUSPECT. REPLACE


RH RELAYS BOX
(Ref. 24-58-13, P. Block 401).

IS CAPTION ON?
NO
1

Effectivity: See TOC

SEE NEXT PAGE

61-31-00

CONFIG. 1
Pag. 102
Jul. 01/98

CN-235 MAINTENANCE MANUAL


1

FROM PREVIOUS PAGE

NO
DISCONNECT CONNECTOR ZD137b AT
RH RELAYS BOX ON RH ELECTRICAL
RACK. INSTALL A SHORTING LINK
BETWEEN PIN 19 ON WAFER A2 AND
PIN 13 ON WAFER B2. DO TEST FOR
POWER SUPPLY AT PIN 18 ON WAFER
A2.

RELAY KE10 IS SUSPECT. REPLACE


RH RELAYS BOX
(Ref. 24-58-13, P. Block 401).
YES

IS POWER SUPPLY AVAILABLE?


NO
DISCONNECT
CONNECTOR ZD133b
FROM CONTROL
QUADRANT ZD133.
(Ref. 76-10-11, P.
Block 401). DO
TEST FOR POWER
SUPPLY AT PIN g ON
CONNECTOR.

DO CONTINUITY TEST
AT CONNECTOR
ZD133b BETWEEN
PINS i AND K.
YES

IS CIRCUIT CLOSED?

ISOLATE FAULT AND


REPAIR OR REPLACE
QUADRANT
(Ref. 76-10-11, P.
Block 401).
YES

IS POWER SUPPLY
AVAILABLE?
NO

NO
REPLACE
WEIGHT-ON-WHEELS
MICROSWITCH, KE8.
(Ref. 32-42-28, P.
Block 401).

Effectivity: See TOC

SEE NEXT PAGE

61-31-00

CONFIG. 1
Pag. 103
Jul. 01/98

CN-235 MAINTENANCE MANUAL


1

FROM PREVIOUS PAGE

DISCONNECT CONNECTOR ZD127a


FROM HYDR UTILITY CONTROL UNIT,
ZD127. DO TEST FOR POWER SUPPLY
AT PIN 17 ON CONNECTOR.

REPLACE HYDR UTILITY CONTROL


UNIT, ZD127.
(Ref. 52-31-11, P. Block 401)
YES

IS POWER SUPPLY AVAILABLE?

NO
DISCONNECT CONNECTOR WB8a FROM
RH FIRE LEVER, WB8. DO TEST FOR
POWER SUPPLY AT PIN a ON
CONNECTOR.

REPLACE FIRE LEVER, WB8


(Ref. 26-21-14, P. Block 401).
YES

IS POWER SUPPLY AVAILABLE?


NO
DISCONNECT CONNECTOR PC8c FROM
R MISCELLANEOUS PANEL, PC8. DO
TEST FOR POWER SUPPLY AT PIN 11
ON CONNECTOR PC8c.

YES

INSPECT WIRING BETWEEN


CONNECTOR PC8c AND CONNECTOR
WB8a. FIND FAULT AND REPAIR OR
REPLACE AS NECESSARY.

IS POWER SUPPLY AVAILABLE?

NO
DO TROUBLESHOOTING PROCEDURE ON
POWER SUPPLY SYSTEM.
(Ref. 24-30-00, P. Block 101).

Effectivity: See TOC

61-31-00

CONFIG. 1
Pag. 104
Jul. 01/98

CN-235 MAINTENANCE MANUAL


B.
WITH CONT SWITCH, KE3, SET TO
"OFF", PROPELLER WILL NOT TURN
AND "PROP BRAKE" CAPTION COMES
ON.

SUPPORT EQUIPMENT REQUIRED:


- MULTIMETER

DISCONNECT CONNECTOR KE1a FROM


HYDRAULIC BRAKE CONTROL VALVE,
KE1. DO TEST FOR POWER SUPPLY
AT PIN C ON CONNECTOR

REPLACE HYDRAULIC BRAKE CONTROL


VALVE
(Ref. 61-31-11, P. Block 401).

YES

IS POWER SUPPLY AVAILABLE?


NO
DISCONNECT CONNECTOR ZD127a
FROM HYDR UTILITY CONTROL UNIT,
ZD127, AND DO TEST FOR POWER
SUPPLY AT PIN 17 ON CONNECTOR.

YES

REPLACE HYDR UTILITY CONTROL


UNIT, ZD127
(Ref. 52-31-11, P. Block 401).

IS POWER SUPPLY AVAILABLE?.


NO
DISCONNECT CONNECTOR WB8a FROM
RH FIRE LEVER UNIT, WB8. DO
TEST FOR POWER SUPPLY AT PIN a
ON CONNECTOR.

REPLACE RH FIRE LEVER UNIT, WB8


(Ref. 26-21-14, P. Block 401).
YES

IS POWER SUPPLY AVAILABLE?


NO
1

Effectivity: See TOC

SEE NEXT PAGE

61-31-00

CONFIG. 1
Pag. 105
Jul. 01/98

CN-235 MAINTENANCE MANUAL


1

FROM PREVIOUS PAGE

NO
DISCONNECT CONNECTOR PC8c FROM
R MISCELLANEOUS CIRCUIT BREAKER
PANEL, PC8. DO TEST FOR POWER
SUPPLY AT PIN 11 ON CONNECTOR
PC8c.

YES

INSPECT WIRING BETWEEN


CONNECTOR PC8c AND CONNECTOR
WB8a. FIND FAULT AND REPAIR OR
REPLACE AS NECESSARY.

IS POWER SUPPLY AVAILABLE?


NO
DO TROUBLESHOOTING PROCEDURE ON
POWER SUPPLY SYSTEM
(Ref. 24-30-00, P. Block 101).

Effectivity: See TOC

61-31-00

CONFIG. 1
Pag. 106
Jul. 01/98

CN-235 MAINTENANCE MANUAL


PROPELLER BRAKE SYSTEM
SERVICING
WARNING:

BEFORE STARTING ANY MAINTENANCE WORK ON THE HYDRAULIC POWER SYSTEM,


MAKE CERTAIN THAT WARNING NOTICES ARE IN POSITION WARNING PERSONNEL
OF WORK IN PROGRESS.

WARNING:

BEFORE APPLYING PRESSURE TO THE HYDRAULIC POWER SYSTEM, MAKE


CERTAIN THAT ALL CONTROLS ARE SET TO CORRESPOND TO THE ACTUAL
POSITION OF THE SERVICES THEY OPERATE.

WARNING:

BEFORE APPLYING PRESSURE TO THE HYDRAULIC POWER SYSTEM, MAKE


CERTAIN THAT ALL HYDRAULICALLY OPERATED COMPONENTS ARE CONNECTED,
AND NO MAINTENANCE WORK ON OR NEAR HYDRAULICALLY OPERATED
COMPONENTS IS IN PROGRESS.

WARNING:

BEFORE ELECTRICAL POWER IS SWITCHED ON TO THE AIRCRAFT, MAKE


CERTAIN THAT ELECTRICAL CIRCUITS ON WHICH WORK IS IN PROGRESS ARE
ISOLATED.

WARNING:

BEFORE STARTING ANY MAINTENANCE WORK ON THE PROPELLER BRAKE, MAKE


CERTAIN THAT WARNING NOTICES ARE IN POSITION WARNING AGAINST
STARTING OF ENGINES.

CAUTION:

HYDRAULIC FLUID DRAINED FROM THE AIRCRAFT HYDRAULIC POWER SYSTEM


MUST NOT BE USED AGAIN IN THE AIRCRAFT SYSTEM.

1. Equipment and Materials


ITEM

DESIGNATION

A.

ITEM 12-12-01

Hydraulic Ground Test Rig

B.

ITEM 20-15-01

Circuit Breaker Safety Clip and Tag

C.

ITEM 24-40-01

Electrical Ground Power Unit (GPU)

D.

Standard Tool

Servicing Platform

E.

Standard Tool

Drain Container

F.

Standard Tool

Warning Notices

G.

MS20995C32

Lockwire

H.

35-92032-0001

Bleed Tubes

Effectivity: See TOC

61-31-00

Pag. 301
Dec. 15/08

CN-235 MAINTENANCE MANUAL


Referenced Procedures:
- 06-41-54,
- 12-12-00,
- 24-40-00,
- 29-00-00,

P.
P.
P.
P.

Block
Block
Block
Block

1
1
201
301

- Access Provisions - Nacelles


- Hydraulic Fluids
- External Power
- Hydraulic Power

2. Procedure
A.

Job Set-Up
(1) Open, safety and tag with ITEM 20-15-01 the following circuit
breaker.
PANEL

SERVICE

BATTERY BUS 1

START

FIN
KA1

(2) Fill hydraulic reservoir (Ref.12-12-00, P. Block 1) .


(3) Connect GPU ITEM 24-40-01 and switch on aircraft electrical
system (Ref.24-40-00, P. Block 201) .
(4) Put warning notices in flight compartment telling personnel of
maintenance task in progress.
(5) Put servicing platform in position and open RH engine cowling
(Ref.06-41-54, P. Block 1) .
(6) Connect hydraulic ground test rig ITEM 12-12-01 and apply
pressure to the aircraft hydraulic system
(Ref.29-00-00, P. Block 301) .
B.

Servicing - Bleeding (Fig. 301)


(1) Remove and discard lockwire MS20995C32 from bleed nipples (5) and
(6).
(2) Install bleed tubes (2) and (3) 35-92032-0001 to bleed nipples
(5) and (6) and put bleed tube ends into a drain container (4).
Cover ends with hydraulic fluid.
(3) On HYDR. UTILITY panel on overhead panel, set propeller brake
switch (1) to ON.
(4) Slowly open bleed nipples (5) and (6) and let hydraulic fluid
flow into drain container until the flow is air free.

Effectivity: See TOC

61-31-00

Pag. 302
Dec. 15/08

CN-235 MAINTENANCE MANUAL


Propeller Brake System - Bleed

CM1.61.31.00.3AO.00.00-01

Fig. 301 Propeller Brake System - Bleed

Effectivity: See TOC

61-31-00

Pag. 303
Dec. 15/08

CN-235 MAINTENANCE MANUAL


(5) Close bleed nipples (5) and (6), remove bleed tubes (2) and (3)
35-92032-0001 , tighten bleed nipples and safety with new
lockwire MS20995C32 .
(6) Set propeller brake switch to off.
(7) Switch off hydraulic test set ITEM 12-12-01 and remove from
aircraft (Ref.29-00-00, P. Block 301) .
C.

Test
(1) Do the propeller brake system test (Ref.61-31-00, P. Block 501)
.

D.

Close-Up
(1) Close RH engine cowling (Ref.06-41-54, P. Block 1) .
(2) Remove servicing platform.
(3) Remove safety clips and tags ITEM 20-15-01. Close the following
circuit breaker.
PANEL

SERVICE

BATTERY BUS 1

START

FIN
KA1

(4) Switch off aircraft electrical system and disconnect GPU ITEM
24-40-01 (Ref.24-40-00, P. Block 201) .
(5) Fill hydraulic reservoir (Ref.12-12-00, P. Block 1) .
(6) Remove all tools and equipment from the work area. Make sure that
the work area is clean.

Effectivity: See TOC

61-31-00

Pag. 304
Dec. 15/08

CN-235 MAINTENANCE MANUAL


PROPELLER BRAKE SYSTEM
ADJUSTMENT/TEST
WARNING:

BEFORE POWER IS SUPPLIED TO THE AIRCRAFT, MAKE SURE THAT ELECTRICAL


CIRCUITS UPON WHICH WORK IS IN PROGRESS ARE ISOLATED.

WARNING:

BEFORE HYDRAULIC POWER SYSTEM IS PRESSURIZED. MAKE SURE THAT ALL


HYDRAULICALLY OPERATED COMPONENTS ARE CONNECTED AND THAT NO
MAINTENANCE WORK NEAR HYDRAULICALLY OPERATED CONTROLS IS IN
PROGRESS.

WARNING:

BEFORE DISCONNECTING ANY HYDRAULIC SYSTEM COMPONENT OR PIPELINE,


MAKE SURE THAT ALL HYDRAULIC POWER SYSTEM PRESSURE IS RELEASED.

CAUTION:

MAKE SURE THAT THERE IS SUFFICIENT CLEARANCE AROUND RH PROPELLER


FOR HAND TURNING.

1. Operational Test of Control Quadrant Switches (GND IDLE, GUST LOCK and
FEATHER) and Weight-On-Wheels Microswitch, KE8
A.

Reason for the Job


To make sure that a replacement component is operational after
installation on the aircraft and that associated electrical circuits
are serviceable.

B.

Equipment and Materials


ITEM

DESIGNATION

(1)

ITEM 20-15-01

Circuit Breaker Safety Clips and Tags

(2)

ITEM 24-40-01 or
ITEM 24-40-02

Ground Power Unit (GPU)

(3)

ITEM 29-00-01

Hydraulic Test Rig

(4)

Standard Tool

Servicing Platform, 2,5 m (8 ft)

(5)

Standard Tool

Warning Notices

Referenced Procedures:
- 24-40-00, P. Block 201
- 29-00-00, P. Block 501

Effectivity: See TOC

- External Power
- Hydraulic Power

61-31-00

Pag. 501
Dec. 15/08

CN-235 MAINTENANCE MANUAL


C.

Procedure
(1) Job Set-Up
(a) Put warning notices in position.
(b) Open, safety and tag with ITEM 20-15-01 the START circuit
breaker, KA1.
(c) Close the following circuit breakers:
PANEL

SERVICE

R MISCELLANEOUS

WARN

KE1

R MISCELLANEOUS

PROP BRAKE

KE2

NOTE:

FIN

Make sure that the aircraft is on the ground and the


weight-on-wheels microswitch, KE8, in the forward
right-hand landing gear, is installed.

(d) Connect the GPU ITEM 24-40-01 or ITEM 24-40-02 and switch on
the aircraft electrical system (Ref. 24-40-00, P. Block 201)
.
(e) Connect a hydraulic ground test rig ITEM 29-00-01 and apply
pressure to the hydraulic system
(Ref. 29-00-00, P. Block 501).
(f) Make sure that the right FIRE lever is not actuated.
(g) Set the control quadrant levers to the following positions:
1

Power Lever - GND IDLE

Gust Lock - GUST LOCK

Condition Lever - START

Effectivity: See TOC

61-31-00

Pag. 502
Dec. 15/08

CN-235 MAINTENANCE MANUAL


Propeller Brake System

CM1.61.31.00.5AO.00.00-03

Fig. 501 Propeller Brake System

Effectivity: See TOC

61-31-00

Pag. 503
Dec. 15/08

CN-235 MAINTENANCE MANUAL


(2) Test (Fig. 501)
ACTION

RESULT

(a) Push the CONT lighted switch, The ON caption of the CONT
KE3 (2), on the HYDR UTILITY
lighted switch, KE3 (2),
control unit, ZD127 (3).
comes on.
Momentarily, the CWP PROP
BRAKE caption (8) and the #1
and #2 captions of the LOW
PRESS IND indicator, KE4 (1),
come on and, then, go off.
The BRAKE caption of the
lighted switch (2) comes on.
(b) Try to turn RH propeller by
hand.

Propeller must not turn.

(c) Move the control quadrant


power lever out of GND IDLE
position.

The propeller stays stopped.

(d) Move the quadrant gust lock


lever out of GUST LOCK
position.

CWP PROP BRAKE caption (8)


comes on. Warning system
operates.
The BRAKE caption of the CONT
lighted switch, KE3 (2),
remains on if the pressure
remains at 2650 psi.

(e) Deactivate sound alarm and


try to turn RH propeller by
hand.

The propeller stays stopped.

(f) Move the quadrant gust lock


lever to GUST LOCK position.
Try to turn RH propeller by
hand.

The propeller stays stopped.


The ON and BRAKE captions of
the CONT lighted switch, KE3
(2), stay on.
CWP PROP BRAKE caption (8)
stays on.

Effectivity: See TOC

61-31-00

Pag. 504
Dec. 15/08

ACTION

CN-235 MAINTENANCE MANUAL


RESULT

(g) Move the control quadrant


The BRAKE caption of the CONT
power lever to GND IDLE
lighted switch, KE3 (2),
position and observe the CONT stays on.
lighted switch, KE3 (2).
The CWP PROP BRAKE caption
(8) goes off.
(h) Try to turn RH propeller by
hand.

The propeller must not turn.

(j) Advance the quadrant


condition lever out of START
position.

The ON and BRAKE captions of


the CONT lighted switch, KE3
(2), stay on.
The CWP PROP BRAKE caption
(8) comes on. Warning system
operates.

(k) Deactivate sound alarm and


try to turn RH propeller by
hand.

The propeller must not turn.

(l) Retard the quadrant condition


lever to START position.
(m) Observe the CONT lighted
switch, KE3 (2), and the CWP
(8).

The ON and BRAKE captions of


the CONT lighted switch, KE3
(2), stay on.
CWP PROP BRAKE caption (8)
goes off.

(n) Try to turn RH propeller by


hand.

The propeller must not turn.

(p) Disconnect the connector KE8a


from weight-on-wheels
microswitch, KE8, installed
in the forward right-hand
landing gear.

The ON and BRAKE captions of


the CONT lighted switch, KE3
(2), stay on.

(q) Deactivate sound alarm and


try to turn RH propeller by
hand.

The propeller must not turn.

Effectivity: See TOC

CWP PROP BRAKE caption (8)


comes on. Warning system
operates.

61-31-00

Pag. 505
Dec. 15/08

ACTION

CN-235 MAINTENANCE MANUAL


RESULT

(r) Connect the connector KE8a to The ON and BRAKE captions of


weight-on-wheels microswitch, the CONT lighted switch, KE3
KE8.
(2), stay on.
CWP PROP BRAKE caption (8)
goes off.
(s) Try to turn RH propeller by
hand.

The propeller must not turn.

(t) Push the CONT lighted switch, The ON and BRAKE captions of
KE3 (2), to set it to off.
the CONT lighted switch, KE3
(2), go off.
CWP PROP BRAKE caption (8)
comes on and, then, goes off.
(u) Try to turn RH propeller by
hand.

The propeller turns easily.

(v) Then, move one of four


propeller brake interlocking
conditions out:

The ON caption of the CONT


lighted switch, KE3 (2),
comes on.

- PL on GND IDLE
- CL on START

The BRAKE caption of the CONT


lighted switch, KE3 (2),
stays off.

- Gust Lock on GUST LOCK


- Aircraft on ground
(microswitch KE8 closed)
and push the CONT lighted
switch, KE3 (2).

(x) Try to turn RH propeller by


hand.

Effectivity: See TOC

The #1 and #2 captions of the


LOW PRESS IND indicator, KE4
(1), come on.
CWP PROP BRAKE caption (8)
comes on. Warning system
operates.
The propeller turns easily.

61-31-00

Pag. 506
Dec. 15/08

ACTION

CN-235 MAINTENANCE MANUAL


RESULT

(y) Push the CONT lighted switch, The ON caption of the CONT
KE3 (2), to set it to off.
lighted switch, KE3 (2), goes
off.
The #1 and #2 captions of the
LOW PRESS IND indicator, KE4
(1), go off.
CWP PROP BRAKE caption (8)
goes off.

(3) Close-Up
(a) Open, safety and tag with ITEM 20-15-01 the following
circuit breakers:
PANEL

SERVICE

FIN

R MISCELLANEOUS

WARN

KE1

R MISCELLANEOUS

PROP BRAKE

KE2

(b) Switch off the aircraft electrical system and disconnect the
GPU (Ref. 24-40-00, P. Block 201) .
(c) Release pressure in hydraulic system
(Ref. 29-00-00, P. Block 501).
(d) Remove the safety clips and tags ITEM 20-15-01 and close the
START circuit breaker, KA1.
(e) Remove the warning notices.
(f) Remove all tools and equipment from the work area. Make sure
that the work area is clean.
2. System Test of Brake Pressure Fault Indication
A.

Reason for the Job


To make sure that the system is operational after the installation of
replacement components.

Effectivity: See TOC

61-31-00

Pag. 507
Dec. 15/08

CN-235 MAINTENANCE MANUAL


B.

Equipment and Materials


ITEM

DESIGNATION

(1)

ITEM 20-15-01

Circuit Breaker Safety Clips and Tags

(2)

ITEM 24-40-01 or
ITEM 24-40-02

Ground Power Unit (GPU)

(3)

Standard Tool

Servicing Platform, 2,5 m (8 ft)

(4)

Standard Tool

Electrical Blanking Caps and Plugs

(5)

Standard Tool

Warning Notices

Referenced Procedures:
- 06-41-57, P. Block 1
- 24-40-00, P. Block 201
- 29-00-00, P. Block 501
C.

- Access Provision - Wings


- External Power
- Hydraulic Power

Procedure (Fig. 501)


(1) Job Set-Up
(a) Put warning notices in position.
(b) Open, safety and tag with ITEM 20-15-01 the following
circuit breakers:
PANEL

SERVICE

BATTERY BUS 1

START

KA1

R MISCELLANEOUS

WARN

KE1

NOTE:

FIN

Make sure that the aircraft is on the ground and the


weight-on-wheels microswitch, KE8, in the forward
right-hand landing gear, is installed.

(c) Connect the GPU ITEM 24-40-01 or ITEM 24-40-02 and switch on
the aircraft electrical system (Ref. 24-40-00, P. Block 201)
.
(d) Put the servicing platform in position at center wing area.
(e) Remove the access panels 931AT to get access to the pressure
switches (5) and (6) (Ref. 06-41-57, P. Block 1).

Effectivity: See TOC

61-31-00

Pag. 508
Dec. 15/08

CN-235 MAINTENANCE MANUAL


(f) Disconnect the connectors from the receptacles of the
pressure switches (5) and (6). Install protective caps on
the exposed switch receptacles.
(g) Remove the safety clips and tags ITEM 20-15-01 and close the
WARN circuit breaker, KE1, opened in step (b).
(h) Supply pressure to the hydraulic system
(Ref. 29-00-00, P. Block 501).
(j) Make sure that the right FIRE lever is not actuated.
(k) Set the control quadrant levers to the following positions:
1

Power Lever - GND IDLE

Gust Lock - GUST LOCK

Condition Lever - START

(2) Test
ACTION

RESULT

(a) Push the CONT lighted switch, ON and BRAKE captions come
KE3 (2), on HYDR UTILITY
on.
control unit, ZD127 (3).
(b) Push the CONT lighted switch, ON and BRAKE captions go off.
KE3 (2), to set it to off.
(c) Connect pins B and C on the
connector KE11a (KE12a) with
a jumper wire.

CWP PROP BRAKE caption (8)


comes on.
Alarm warning operates.

(d) Remove the jumper wire from


the connector KE11a (KE12a).

CWP PROP BRAKE caption (8)


goes off.

(3) Close-Up
(a) Open, safety and tag with ITEM 20-15-01 the WARN circuit
breaker, KE1.

Effectivity: See TOC

61-31-00

Pag. 509
Dec. 15/08

CN-235 MAINTENANCE MANUAL


(b) Switch off the aircraft electrical system and disconnect the
GPU (Ref. 24-40-00, P. Block 201) .
(c) Remove safety clip and tag ITEM 20-15-01 and close the START
circuit breaker, KA1.
(d) Remove the protective caps from the pressure switches (5)
and (6) receptacles and connect the electrical connectors to
the switch receptacles.
(e) Install the access panels 931AT previously removed
(Ref. 06-41-57, P. Block 1).
(f) Remove the servicing platform from the center wing area.
(g) Release the pressure in the hydraulic system
(Ref. 29-00-00, P. Block 1).
(h) Remove all tools and equipment from the work area. Make sure
that the work area is clean.
(j) Do the Operational Test procedure (Ref. para. 1).
3. System Test of Propeller Brake Control Valve Low Pressure Indicator
A.

Reason for the Job


To make sure that the system is operational after the installation of
a replacement propeller brake control valve.

B.

Equipment and Materials


ITEM

DESIGNATION

(1)

ITEM 20-15-01

Circuit Breaker Safety Clips and Tags

(2)

ITEM 24-40-01 or
ITEM 24-40-02

Ground Power Unit (GPU)

(3)

Standard Tool

Servicing Platform, 2,5 m (8 ft)

(4)

Standard Tool

Electrical Blanking Caps and Plugs

(5)

Standard Tool

Warning Notices

Referenced Procedures:
- 06-41-57, P. Block 501
- 24-40-00, P. Block 201

Effectivity: See TOC

- Access Provisions - Wings


- External Power

61-31-00

Pag. 510
Dec. 15/08

CN-235 MAINTENANCE MANUAL


- 29-00-00, P. Block 501
C.

- Hydraulic Power

Procedure (Fig. 501)


(1) Job Set-Up
(a) Put warning notices in position.
(b) Open, safety and tag with ITEM 20-15-01 the following
circuit breakers:
PANEL

SERVICE

BATTERY BUS 1

START

KA1

R MISCELLANEOUS

WARN

KE1

R MISCELLANEOUS

PROP BRAKE

KE2

NOTE:

FIN

Make sure that the aircraft is on the ground and the


weight-on-wheels microswitch, KE8, in the forward
right-hand landing gear, is installed.

(c) Connect the GPU ITEM 24-40-01 or ITEM 24-40-02 and switch on
the aircraft electrical system (Ref. 24-40-00, P. Block 201)
.
(d) Put the servicing platform in position at center wing area.
Remove the center wing upper rear fairings
(Ref. 06-41-57, P. Block 1).
(e) Disconnect the electrical connector from the propeller brake
control valve (4). Install protective blanking cap.
(f) Remove safety clips and tags ITEM 20-15-01 , and close the
WARN and PROP BRAKE circuit breakers, KE1 and KE2.
(g) Supply pressure to the hydraulic system
(Ref. 29-00-00, P. Block 501).
(h) Make sure that the right FIRE lever is not actuated.
(j) Set the control quadrant levers to the following positions.
1

Power Lever - GND IDLE

Gust Lock - GUST LOCK

Condition Lever - START

Effectivity: See TOC

61-31-00

Pag. 511
Dec. 15/08

CN-235 MAINTENANCE MANUAL


(2) Test
ACTION

RESULT

(a) Push the CONT lighted switch, ON and BRAKE captions come
KE3 (2), on the HYDR UTILITY
on.
control unit, ZD127 (3).
(b) Connect pins K and G on the
connector KE1a with a jumper
wire.

#1 caption of the LOW PRESS


IND indicator, KE4 (1), comes
on.
CWP PROP BRAKE caption (8)
comes on. Warning alarm
operates.

(c) Remove the jumper wire from


the connector pins.

#1 caption of the LOW PRESS


IND indicator, KE4 (1), goes
off.
CWP PROP BRAKE caption (8)
goes off.

(d) Connect pins E and F on the


connector KE1a with a jumper
wire.

#2 caption of the LOW PRESS


IND indicator, KE4 (1), comes
on.
CWP PROP BRAKE caption (8)
comes on. Warning alarm
operates.

(e) Remove the jumper wire from


the connector pins.

#2 caption of the LOW PRESS


IND indicator, KE4 (1), goes
off.
CWP PROP BRAKE caption (8)
goes off.

(f) Push the CONT lighted switch, The ON and BRAKE captions of
KE3 (2), to set it to off.
the CONT lighted switch, KE
(2), go off.

(3) Close-Up
(a) Open, safety and tag ITEM 20-15-01 the following circuit
breakers:

Effectivity: See TOC

61-31-00

Pag. 512
Dec. 15/08

CN-235 MAINTENANCE MANUAL


PANEL

SERVICE

FIN

R MISCELLANEOUS

PROP BRAKE

KE2

R MISCELLANEOUS

WARN

KE1

(b) Remove the protective cap from the hydraulic propeller brake
control valve receptacle (4).
(c) Connect the electrical connector KE1a to the unit receptacle
(4).
(d) Install the center wing upper rear fairings previously
removed (Ref. 06-41-57, P. Block 501).
(e) Remove the servicing platform from the center wing area.
(f) Release pressure in the hydraulic system
(Ref. 29-00-00, P. Block 501).
(g) Remove safety clips and tags ITEM 20-15-01 and close the
START circuit breaker, KA1.
(h) Switch off the aircraft electrical system and disconnect the
GPU (Ref. 24-40-00, P. Block 201).
(j) Remove all tools and equipment from the work area. Make sure
that the work area is clean.
(k) Do the Operational Test procedure (Ref. para. 1)
4. System Test of RH FIRE Lever Switch
A.

Reason for the Job


To make sure that the system is operational after the installation of
replacement components.

B.

Equipment and Materials


ITEM

DESIGNATION

(1)

ITEM 20-15-01

Circuit Breaker Safety Clips and Tags

(2)

ITEM 24-40-01 or
ITEM 24-40-02

Ground Power Unit (GPU)

(3)

Standard Tool

Servicing Platform 2,5 m (8 ft)

Effectivity: See TOC

61-31-00

Pag. 513
Dec. 15/08

CN-235 MAINTENANCE MANUAL


DESIGNATION

ITEM
(4)

Standard Tool

Warning Notices

Referenced Procedures:
- 06-41-57, P. Block 1
- 24-40-00, P. Block 201
- 29-00-00, P. Block 501
C.

- Access Provisions - Wings


- External Power
- Hydraulic Power

Procedure
(1) Job Set-Up
(a) Put warning notices in position.
(b) Open, safety and tag with ITEM 20-15-01 the following
circuit breakers:
PANEL

SERVICE

BATTERY BUS 1

START

KA1

BATTERY BUS 1

R EXTIN

WB1

BATTERY BUS 2

R EXTIN

WB4

NOTE:

FIN

Make sure that the aircraft is on the ground and the


weight-on-wheels microswitch, KE8, in the forward
right-hand landing gear, is installed.

(c) Make sure that the following circuit breakers are closed:
PANEL

SERVICE

FIN

R MISCELLANEOUS

WARN

KE1

R MISCELLANEOUS

PROP BRAKE

KE2

(d) Connect the GPU ITEM 24-40-01 or ITEM 24-40-02 and switch on
the aircraft electrical system (Ref. 24-40-00, P. Block 201)
.
(e) Supply pressure to the hydraulic system
(Ref. 29-00-00, P. Block 501).

Effectivity: See TOC

61-31-00

Pag. 514
Dec. 15/08

CN-235 MAINTENANCE MANUAL


(f) Set the control quadrant levers to the following positions:
1

Power Lever - GND IDLE

Gust Lock - GUST LOCK

Condition Lever - START

(2) Test
ACTION

RESULT

(a) Push the CONT lighted switch, The ON caption of the CONT
KE3 (2), on HYDR UTILITY
lighted switch, KE3 (2),
control unit, ZD127 (3).
comes on.
Momentarily, PROP BRAKE
caption (8) and #1 and #2
captions of the LOW PRESS IND
indicator, KE4 (1), come on
and, then, go off.
The BRAKE caption of the CONT
lighted switch, KE3 (2),
comes on.
(b) Try to turn RH propeller by
hand.

The propeller must not turn.

(c) Pull out RH FIRE Lever


switch, WB8 (7), and keep it
in actuated position.

Captions of the CONT lighted


switch, KE3 (2), go off.

(d) Try to turn RH propeller by


hand.

The propeller turns easily.

(e) Push RH FIRE Lever switch,


WB8 (7), to off position.
(f) Observe the CONT lighted
switch, KE3 (2).

The ON and BRAKE captions of


the CONT lighted switch, KE3
(2), come on.

(g) Try to turn RH propeller by


hand.

The propeller must not turn.

Effectivity: See TOC

61-31-00

Pag. 515
Dec. 15/08

ACTION

CN-235 MAINTENANCE MANUAL


RESULT

(h) Set the CONT lighted switch,


KE3 (2), to off. Try to turn
RH propeller by hand.

The propeller turns easily.


The ON and BRAKE captions of
the CONT lighted switch, KE3
(2), go off.

(3) Close-Up
(a) Open, safety and tag with ITEM 20-15-01 the following
circuit breakers:
PANEL

SERVICE

FIN

R MISCELLANEOUS

WARN

KE1

R MISCELLANEOUS

PROP BRAKE

KE2

(b) Release pressure in the aircraft hydraulic system


(Ref. 29-00-00, P. Block 501).
(c) Switch off the aircraft electrical system and disconnect the
GPU (Ref. 24-40-00, P. Block 201).
(d) Remove the safety clips and tags ITEM 20-15-01 and close the
START circuit breaker, KA1.
(e) Remove the warning notices.
(f) Remove all tools and equipment from the work area. Make sure
that the work area is clean.
(g) Do Operational Test procedure (Ref. para. 1).

Effectivity: See TOC

61-31-00

Pag. 516
Dec. 15/08

CN-235 MAINTENANCE MANUAL

5. System Test with RH Engine Running


CAUTION:

DO NOT OPERATE THE PROPELLER BRAKE WHEN:


- THERE ARE ICE FORMATION CONDITIONS (T< 5C)
- THE "FUEL COLD" ANNUNCIATOR IS ON.
WHEN YOU OPERATE THE PROPELLER BRAKE LET A MINIMUM OF TEN
MINUTES BEFORE YOU OPERATE IT AGAIN.
BE CAREFUL DURING THE PROPELLER BRAKE OPERATION. MAKE SURE THAT
NONE STAYS NEAR THE RIGHT ENGINE FOR INSPECTION.

CAUTION:

NOTE:

A.

THE RH PROPELLER MUST NOT MOVE AT ANY TIME WHEN THE ENGINE IS
RUNNING AND THE PROPELLER BRAKE IS ON. IF ANY MOVEMENT TAKES
PLACE, THE ENGINE MUST BE SHUT DOWN AND A TROUBLESHOOTING
PROCEDURE DONE ON THE PROPELLER BRAKE SYSTEM
(Ref. 61-31-00, P. Block 101).

The first propeller brake application of any day must be done with
the engine running to make sure that the systems operate
correctly.

Reason for the Job


To make sure that the propeller brake operates correctly when the RH
engine is running.

B.

Equipment and Materials


ITEM

DESIGNATION

(1)

ITEM 10-10-01

Wheel Chocks

(2)

ITEM 24-40-01 or
ITEM 24-40-02

Ground Power Unit (GPU)

(3)

ITEM 29-00-01

Hydraulic Test Rig

(4)

Standard Tool

Warning Notices

Referenced Procedures:
- 10-10-00,
- 24-40-00,
- 29-00-00,
- 61-31-00,
- 71-00-00,

P.
P.
P.
P.
P.

Effectivity: See TOC

Block
Block
Block
Block
Block

1
201
501
101
501

- Parking
- External Power
- Hydraulic Power
- Propeller Brake System
- Power Plant

61-31-00

Pag. 517
Dec. 15/08

CN-235 MAINTENANCE MANUAL


C.

Procedure
(1) Job Set-Up
(a) Park the aircraft on an engine running area and chock all
the wheels ITEM 10-10-01 (Ref. 10-10-00, P. Block 1).
(b) Put warning notices in position telling personnel that
engine running is being done.
(c) Connect the GPU ITEM 24-40-01 or ITEM 24-40-02 and switch on
the aircraft electrical system (Ref. 24-40-00, P. Block 201)
.
(d) Connect the hydraulic ground test rig ITEM 29-00-01 and
apply pressure to the hydraulic system
(Ref. 29-00-00, P. Block 501).
(2) Test of Propeller Brake with Engine Running
ACTION

RESULT

(a) Start RH engine


(Ref. 71-00-00, P. Block 501)
.
(b) Check the aircraft hydraulic
system pressure.

Minimum pressure should be


2950 psi.

(c) Turn off the air conditioning


system.
(d) Set the RH power lever to GND
IDLE position.
(e) Set the RH condition lever to The RH propeller feathers.
START position.
(f) Set the gust lock lever to
GUST LOCK position.

Effectivity: See TOC

61-31-00

Pag. 518
Dec. 15/08

CN-235 MAINTENANCE MANUAL


RESULT

ACTION

(g) Push the CONT lighted switch, The ON caption of the CONT
KE3 (2), on HYDR UTILITY
lighted switch, KE3 (2),
control unit, ZD127 (3).
comes on.
Momentarily, PROP BRAKE
caption (8) and #1 and #2
captions of the LOW PRESS IND
indicator, KE4 (1), come on
and, then, go off.
The BRAKE caption of the CONT
lighted switch, KE3 (2),
comes on.
The RH propeller stops
turning before 5 seconds.
NOTE:

If the propeller does not stop turning, set the propeller


brake switch to OFF, shut down the engine and do the
troubleshooting procedure (Ref. 61-31-00, P. Block 101).

(h) Push the CONT lighted switch, The RH engine stops.


KE3 (2), to set it to off and
shut down the engine.
The ON and BRAKE captions of
the CONT lighted switch, KE3
(2), go off.

(3) Close-Up
(a) Switch off the aircraft electrical system and disconnect the
GPU (Ref. 24-40-00, P. Block 201) .
(b) Release the pressure in the aircraft hydraulic system
(Ref. 29-00-00, P. Block 501).
(c) Remove the warning notices.
(d) Remove all tools and equipment from the work area. Make sure
that the work area is clean.

Effectivity: See TOC

61-31-00

Pag. 519
Dec. 15/08

CN-235 MAINTENANCE MANUAL

INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK

Effectivity: See TOC

61-31-00

Pag. 520
Dec. 15/08

CN-235 MAINTENANCE MANUAL


PROPELLER BRAKE CONTROL VALVE
REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
WARNING:

BEFORE STARTING MAINTENANCE WORK ON THE PROPELLER BRAKE SYSTEM,


MAKE CERTAIN THAT ALL HYDRAULIC SYSTEM PRESSURE HAS BEEN RELEASED.

WARNING:

MAKE CERTAIN THAT RELEVANT ELECTRICAL CIRCUITS ARE ISOLATED.

1. Equipment and Materials


ITEM

DESIGNATION

A.

ITEM 20-15-01

Circuit Breaker Safety Clips and Tags

B.

Standard Tool

Blanking Plugs and Caps

C.

Standard Tool

Servicing Platform, 3 m (10 ft)

D.

Standard Tool

Container

E.

Standard Tool

Warning Notices

F.

Z-24.930

Cotton Wipers

Referenced Procedures:
- 06-41-57,
- 12-12-00,
- 20-21-00,
- 29-10-00,
- 61-31-00,
- 61-31-00,

P.
P.
P.
P.
P.
P.

Block
Block
Block
Block
Block
Block

1
1
1
301
301
501

- Access Provision - Wings


- Hydraulic Fluids
- Standard Torques
- Main Hydraulic System
- Propeller Brake System
- Propeller Brake System

2. Procedure
A.

Job Set-Up
(1) Open, safety and tag with ITEM 20-15-01 the following circuit
breakers:
PANEL

SERVICE

MISCELLANEOUS

No. 1 HYDR. PUMP


No. 2 HYDR.PUMP

Effectivity: See TOC

FIN
QC1
QC2

61-31-11

Pag. 401
Dec. 15/08

PANEL

CN-235 MAINTENANCE MANUAL


SERVICE

R MISCELLANEOUS

PROP BRAKE
WRN

FIN

KE2
KE1

(2) Put warning notices in position telling personnel not to operate


propeller brake or hydraulic systems.
(3) Put servicing platform in position at center wing rear fairings.
(4) Remove relevant center wing rear access panels
(Ref. 06-41-57, P. Block 1).
(5) Put container under valve to collect hydraulic fluid.
(6) Release all hydraulic system pressure
(Ref. 12-12-00, P. Block 1).
B.

Removal (Fig. 401)


(1) Disconnect electrical connector (1) from receptacle (3). Install
protective plug and cap on connector and receptacle.
(2) Disconnect brake pressure pipeline connectors (2), (13) from
fittings (4), (12). Install protective plugs and caps on
connectors and fittings.
(3) Disconnect pressure and return pipeline connectors (8), (11) from
fittings (7). Install protective plugs and caps on connectors and
fittings.
(4) Remove container and drained fluid from work area. Wipe up any
fluid spillage. Z-24.930
(5) Remove bolts (5) and washers (6) fastening valve (10) to support
(9).
(6) Remove valve (10) from aircraft.

C.

Preparation of the Replacement Component (Fig. 401)


(1) Remove the protective plug and cap from the valve (10).
(2) Examine the valve (10) for signs of damage or corrosion. Replace
as necessary.

Effectivity: See TOC

61-31-11

Pag. 402
Dec. 15/08

CN-235 MAINTENANCE MANUAL


D.

Preparation for Installation (Fig. 401)


(1) Inspect support (9) for damage, corrosion and security of anchor
nuts. Repair or replace as necessary.
(2) Remove protective plug from connector (1) and inspect for damage,
corrosion and deterioration of insulation. Repair or replace as
necessary.

Effectivity: See TOC

61-31-11

Pag. 403
Dec. 15/08

CN-235 MAINTENANCE MANUAL


Propeller Brake Control Valve KE1

CM1.61.31.11.4AO.00.00-01

Fig. 401 Propeller Brake Control Valve KE1

Effectivity: See TOC

61-31-11

Pag. 404
Dec. 15/08

CN-235 MAINTENANCE MANUAL


E.

Installation (Fig. 401)


(1) Install valve (10) to support (9) with bolts (5) and washers (6).
Tighten bolts (5) to standard torque value
(Ref.20-21-00, P. Block 1) .
(2) Remove protective plugs and caps and connect brake pressure
pipeline connectors (2), (13) to valve fittings (4), (12).
(3) Remove protective plugs and caps and connect pressure and return
pipeline connectors (8), (11) to pressure and return fittings
(7).
(4) Tighten pipeline connectors (2), (13), (8), (11) to standard
torque value (Ref.20-21-00, P. Block 1) .
(5) Connect electrical connector (1) to receptacle (3).

F.

Test
(1) Remove safety clips and tags ITEM 20-15-01. Close the following
circuit breakers:
PANEL

SERVICE

FIN

MISCELLANEOUS

No. 1 HYDR. PUMP


No. 2 HYDR.PUMP

QC1
QC2

R MISCELLANEOUS

PROP BRAKE
WRN

KE2
KE1

(2) Bleed main hydraulic system (Ref. 29-10-00, P. Block 301).


(3) Bleed propeller brake system (Ref. 61-31-00, P. Block 301).
(4) Do propeller brake system adjustment/test procedure
(Ref. 61-31-00, P. Block 501).
G.

Close-Up
(1) Install removed wing fairings (Ref. 06-41-57, P. Block 1).
(2) Remove servicing platform.
(3) Remove warning notices.
(4) Remove all tools and equipment from the work area. Make sure that
the work area is clean.

Effectivity: See TOC

61-31-11

Pag. 405
Dec. 15/08

CN-235 MAINTENANCE MANUAL

INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK

Effectivity: See TOC

61-31-11

Pag. 406
Dec. 15/08

CN-235 MAINTENANCE MANUAL


QUICK DISCONNECT COUPLINGS
REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
WARNING:

BEFORE STARTING MAINTENANCE WORK ON THE SYSTEM, PUT NOTICES WARNING


AGAINST STARTING OR GROUND RUNNING OF RELEVANT ENGINE IN FLIGHT
COMPARTMENT.

WARNING:

MAKE CERTAIN THAT ALL HYDRAULIC SYSTEM PRESSURE IS RELEASED.

WARNING:

BEFORE ELECTRICAL POWER IS SUPPLIED TO THE AIRCRAFT, MAKE CERTAIN


THAT ELECTRICAL CIRCUITS UPON WHICH WORK IS IN PROGRESS ARE
ISOLATED.

WARNING:

BEFORE HYDRAULIC POWER SYSTEM IS PRESSURIZED, MAKE CERTAIN THAT ALL


CONTROLS ARE SET TO AGREE WITH THE ACTUAL POSITION OF THE SERVICES
THEY OPERATE.

WARNING:

BEFORE HYDRAULIC POWER SYSTEM IS PRESSURIZED, MAKE CERTAIN THAT ALL


HYDRAULICALLY OPERATED COMPONENTS ARE CONNECTED AND THAT NO
MAINTENANCE WORK NEAR HYDRAULICALLY OPERATED CONTROLS IS IN
PROGRESS.

CAUTION:

HYDRAULIC FLUID DRAINED OR BLED FROM AIRCRAFT MUST NOT BE USED


AGAIN IN AIRCRAFT SYSTEM.

1. Reason for the Job


To remove and install the quick-disconnect couplings, when it is
unserviceable or to get access to other components.
2. Equipment and Materials
ITEM

DESIGNATION

A.

ITEM 20-15-01

Circuit Breaker Safety Clips and Tags

B.

Standard Tool

Servicing Platform 3 m (10 ft)

C.

Standard Tool

Container

D.

Standard Tool

Drip Tray

E.

Standard Tool

Warning Notices

Referenced Procedures:
- 06-41-54, P. Block 1
- 12-12-00, P. Block 1
- 20-21-00, P. Block 1
Effectivity: See TOC

- Access Panels - Nacelle


- Servicing Hydraulic Fluids
- Standard Torques

61-31-12

Pag. 401
Dec. 15/08

CN-235 MAINTENANCE MANUAL


- 29-10-00, P. Block 301
- 61-31-00, P. Block 301
- 61-31-00, P. Block 501

- Main Hydraulic Power


- Propeller Brake System
- Propeller Brake System

3. Procedure
A.

Job Set-Up
(1) Open, safety and tag with ITEM 20-15-01 the following circuit
breakers:
PANEL

SERVICE

FIN

BATTERY BUS 1

START

KA1

MISCELLANEOUS

No.1 HYDR. PUMP


No.2 HYDR. PUMP

QC1
QC2

R MISCELLANEOUS

PROP BRAKE

KE2

(2) Release all pressure in hydraulic system


(Ref. 12-12-00, P. Block 1).
(3) Put drip tray under RH propeller gearbox.
(4) Put access platform under RH engine.
(5) Put warning notices in flight compartment telling personnel not
to operate hydraulic system, propeller brake or start RH engine.
(6) Open engine cowlings 422AL (Ref. 06-41-54, P. Block 1).
B.

Removal (Fig. 401)


(1) Disconnect hose (7) from female coupling (9). Let fluid drain
from pipeline into container. Install protective plug on hose
connection (8).
(2) At rear of interface (1), disconnect hose (2) from male coupling
(4). Install protective plug on hose connection.
(3) At rear of interface (1), remove locknut (3) securing
quick-disconnect coupling to interface (1).
(4) Remove quick-disconnect coupling from interface (1). Install
protective caps to coupling open ends. Wipe up any fluid
spillage.

Effectivity: See TOC

61-31-12

Pag. 402
Dec. 15/08

CN-235 MAINTENANCE MANUAL


C.

Preparation of the Replacement Component (Fig. 401)


(1) Examine the quick disconnect couplings for signs of damage or
corrosion. Replace as necessary.

Effectivity: See TOC

61-31-12

Pag. 403
Dec. 15/08

CN-235 MAINTENANCE MANUAL


D.

Preparation for Installation (Fig. 401)


(1) Inspect interface (1) for damage and corrosion. Repair as
necessary.
(2) Remove protective plugs from hose connections (2), (8). Inspect
connections for damaged threads and corrosion. Repair or replace
as necessary.

E.

Installation (Fig. 401)


(1) Install quick-disconnect male coupling (4) thru interface (1).
Secure coupling to interface with locknut (3). Tighten locknut to
standard torque value (Ref.20-21-00, P. Block 1) .
(2) Remove protective plugs and caps from coupling and hose
connections (2), (8). Connect connections (2), (8) to
half-couplings (5), (6). Using two spanners, tighten hose
connections to standard torque value (Ref.20-21-00, P. Block 1)
.

F.

Test (Fig. 401)


(1) Remove safety clips and tags ITEM 20-15-01. Close the following
circuit breakers:
PANEL

SERVICE

FIN

BATTERY BUS 1

START

KA1

MISCELLANEOUS

No. 1 HYDR. PUMP


No.2 HYDR. PUMP

QC1
QC2

R MISCELLANEOUS

PROP BRAKE

KE2

(2) Release quick-disconnect half-couplings (5), (6) by pulling


coupling (9) away from ratchet teeth. Disconnect coupling (9) by
turning counterclockwise.
(3) Make certain that half-coupling interfaces are clean and free
from dirt. Connect half coupling (6) to half-coupling (5) and
turn clockwise until ratchet teeth are fully engaged. Make
certain that teeth are fully engaged without using excessive
force.
(4) Bleed system free of air (Ref. 61-31-00, P. Block 301).
(5) Do propeller brake adjustment/test (Ref. 61-31-00, P. Block 501).

Effectivity: See TOC

61-31-12

Pag. 404
Dec. 15/08

CN-235 MAINTENANCE MANUAL


G.

Close-Up
(1) Remove drip tray. Wipe up any fluid spillage.
(2) Close and secure engine cowling 422AL previously removed
(Ref.06-41-54, P. Block 1).
(3) Remove access platform.
(4) Remove warning notices.
(5) Remove all tools and equipment from the work area. Make sure that
the work area is clean.

Effectivity: See TOC

61-31-12

Pag. 405
Dec. 15/08

CN-235 MAINTENANCE MANUAL


Quick-Disconnect Couplings

CM1.61.31.12.4AO.00.00-01

Fig. 401 Quick-Disconnect Couplings

Effectivity: See TOC

61-31-12

Pag. 406
Dec. 15/08

CN-235 MAINTENANCE MANUAL


PRESSURE SWITCH

KE11, KE12

REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
WARNING:

BEFORE STARTING MAINTENANCE WORK ON THE PROPELLER BRAKE SYSTEM,


MAKE CERTAIN THAT ALL HYDRAULIC SYSTEM PRESSURE HAS BEEN RELEASED.

1. Equipment and Materials


ITEM

DESIGNATION

A.

Warning Notices

B.

Blanking Plugs and Caps

C.

Servicing Platform, 3 m (10 ft)

D.

Drain Container

E.

Z-24.930

Lint-free Cloth

F.

MS20995C32

Lockwire, 0,8 mm (0,032 in)

G.

MS28778-4

Preformed Packing

Referenced Procedures:
- 06-41-57,
- 12-12-00,
- 61-31-00,
- 61-31-00,

P.
P.
P.
P.

Block
Block
Block
Block

1
1
301
501

- Access Provisions - Wings


- Hydraulic Fluids
- Propeller Brake System
- Propeller Brake System

2. Procedure
A.

Job Set-Up
(1) Open, safety and tag the following circuit breakers:
PANEL

SERVICE

FIN

MISCELLANEOUS

No. 1 HYDR. PUMP


No. 2 HYDR. PUMP

QC1
QC2

R MISCELLANEOUS

WRN

KE1

(2) Put warning notices in position telling personnel not to operate


propeller brake or hydraulic systems.
(3) Put servicing platform in position at center wing rear fairings.

Effectivity: See TOC

61-31-13

Pag. 401
Mar. 31/00

CN-235 MAINTENANCE MANUAL


(4) Remove relevant center wing rear fairings
(Ref. 06-41-57, P. Block 1).
(5) Put drain container under pressure switch to collect hydraulic
fluid.
(6) Release all hydraulic system pressure
(Ref. 12-12-00, P. Block 1).
B.

Removal (Fig. 401)


(1) Disconnect electrical connector (3) from receptacle. Install
blanking plug and cap on connector and receptacle.
(2) Remove and discard lockwire from pressure switch (2). Remove
pressure switch (2) from tee-fitting (1). Install blanking plug
and cap to switch and fitting.
(3) Remove pressure switch (2) from aircraft.
(4) Remove and discard preformed packing (4).

C.

Preparation for Installation (Fig. 401)


(1) Inspect tee-fitting (1) for damage and corrosion.
(2) Remove protective plug and cap and inspect connector (3) and
receptacle for damage and corrosion.

D.

Installation (Fig. 401)


(1) Remove blanking plug and cap from pressure switch (2) and
tee-fitting (1).
(2) Install new preformed packing (4) to pressure switch (2).
(3) Install pressure switch (2) to tee-fitting (1). Tighten pressure
switch (2) and safety with new lockwire.

Effectivity: See TOC

61-31-13

Pag. 402
Mar. 31/00

CN-235 MAINTENANCE MANUAL


Pressure Switch

CM1.61.31.13.4AO.00.00-02

Fig. 401 Pressure Switch

Effectivity: See TOC

61-31-13

Pag. 403
Mar. 31/00

CN-235 MAINTENANCE MANUAL


(4) Remove blanking plug and cap and connect connector (3) to
pressure switch receptacle.
E.

Test
(1) Bleed propeller brake system (Ref. 06-31-00, P. Block 301).
(2) Inspect pressure switch for fluid leakage. Replace if necessary.
(3) Replenish hydraulic reservoir (Ref. 12-12-00, P. Block 1).
(4) Do propeller brake system adjustment/test
(Ref. 61-31-00, P. Block 501).

F.

Close-Up
(1) Remove drain container from work area, and wipe up any spilt
fluid.
(2) Make certain that work area is clean and clear of tools and
miscellaneous equipment.
(3) Install center wing rear fairings previously removed
(Ref. 06-41-57, P. Block 1).
(4) Remove servicing platform.
(5) Remove safety clips and tags and close circuit breakers QC1, QC2
and KE1.
(6) Remove warning notices.
(7) Make certain that all tools and equipment are removed from the
vicinity of aircraft.

Effectivity: See TOC

61-31-13

Pag. 404
Mar. 31/00

CN-235 MAINTENANCE MANUAL


PROPELLER BRAKE HEAD ASSEMBLY
REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
WARNING:

BEFORE STARTING MAINTENANCE WORK ON THE PROPELLER BRAKE SYSTEM, PUT


NOTICES WARNING AGAINST STARTING OF THE ENGINE IN THE FLIGHT
COMPARTMENT.

WARNING:

MAKE SURE THAT ELECTRICAL CIRCUITS INVOLVED ARE ISOLATED.

WARNING:

MAKE SURE THAT ALL HYDRAULIC SYSTEM PRESSURE IS RELEASED.

WARNING:

BE CAREFUL WHEN YOU USE OILS AND GREASES.


OBEY THE MATERIAL MANUFACTURER'S INSTRUCTIONS AND THE LOCAL
REGULATIONS.
USE PROTECTIVE CLOTHING, GOGGLES AND GLOVES. IF YOU GET OIL AND
GREASE:
- ON YOUR SKIN, REMOVE IT WITH SOAP AND CLEAN WATER.
- IN YOUR EYES OR IN YOUR MOUTH, FLUSH IT AWAY WITH CLEAN WATER.
- GET MEDICAL AID.
IN GENERAL, OILS AND GREASES ARE POISONOUS AND SKIN IRRITANTS.

CAUTION:

ONCE USED, DISK AND CARRIER AND LINING ASSEMBLIES MUST BE KEPT
TOGETHER AS A SET. THIS IS DUE TO UNIQUE WEAR PATTERNS THAT DEVELOP
ON MATING WEAR SURFACES. PRIOR TO DISASSEMBLY, MARK THE DISKS TO
MAINTAIN FORWARD AND AFT RELATIONSHIP WITH PADS DURING
INSTALLATION.

1. Equipment and Materials


ITEM

DESIGNATION

A.

ITEM 20-15-01

Circuit Breaker Safety Clips and Tags

B.

ITEM 71-00-22

Propeller Brake Wrench

C.

ITEM 71-00-23

Propeller Brake Chuck Wrench

D.

Standard Tool

Access Platform, 3 m (118 in)

E.

Standard Tool

Protective Plugs and Caps

F.

Standard Tool

Warning Notices

G.

Z-21.209

Grease

Effectivity: See TOC

61-31-14

Pag. 401
Dec. 15/08

CN-235 MAINTENANCE MANUAL


Referenced Procedures:
- 12-12-00,
- 20-21-00,
- 61-31-00,
- 61-31-00,

P.
P.
P.
P.

Block
Block
Block
Block

1
1
301
501

- Servicing Hydraulic Fluids


- Standard Torques
- Propeller Brake System
- Propeller Brake System

** On A/C: Except CG01


- 71-10-11, P. Block 401

- Cowlings - Zone 412 (422)

** On A/C: Only for CG01


- 71-11-11, P. Block 401

- Cowlings - Zone 412 (422)

** On A/C: All
2. Procedure
A.

Job Set-Up
(1) Open, safety and tag with ITEM 20-15-01 the following circuit
breakers:
PANEL

SERVICE

FIN

BATTERY BUS 1

START

KA1

MISCELLANEOUS

HYDR PUMP 1
HYDR PUMP 2

QC1
QC2

R MISCELLANEOUS

PROP BRAKE

KE2

(2) Put warning notices in flight compartment to prevent starting of


RH engine.
(3) Put access platform under RH engine.
** On A/C: Except CG01
(4) Remove engine cowling 422AL (Ref. 71-10-11, P. Block 401).
** On A/C: Only for CG01
(5) Remove engine cowling 422AL (Ref.71-11-11, P. Block 401).
** On A/C: All
(6) Release all hydraulic system pressure (Ref. 12-12-00, P. Block 1)

Effectivity: See TOC

61-31-14

Pag. 402
Dec. 15/08

CN-235 MAINTENANCE MANUAL


B.

Removal (Fig. 401)


(1) Removal of Brake Head Assembly and Disk (Fig. 401)
(a) Remove six self-locking nuts (16), six washers (15) on the
aft disk surface, six washers (12) and six bolts (11), on
the forward surface attaching disk (13) to brake disk drive
(14).
(b) Remove disk (13) by sliding disk outward from gearbox and
downward from brake head assembly.
(c) Remove quick disconnect couplings (9) from half quick
connection (10).
(d) Remove two bolts (7) and two washers (6) attaching the brake
head (1) to the gearbox.
(e) Remove brake head assembly (1) from aircraft.

Effectivity: See TOC

61-31-14

Pag. 403
Dec. 15/08

CN-235 MAINTENANCE MANUAL


Propeller Brake Head Assembly

CM1.61.31.14.4AO.00.00-03

Fig. 401 Propeller Brake Head Assembly

Effectivity: See TOC

61-31-14

Pag. 404
Dec. 15/08

CN-235 MAINTENANCE MANUAL


(2) Removal of Carrier and Lining Assembly (Fig. 401)
(a) Remove hoses (2) and (3) from brake head assembly (1).
(b) Drain all hydraulic oil from brake housing.
(c) Install protective plugs and caps to exposed ducts.
(d) Remove carrier and lining assemblies. Obey the instructions
(Ref. G. E. Maintenance Manual 72-10-00, P. Block 401).
C.

Preparation of Replacement Component (Fig. 401)


(1) Install carrier and lining assemblies to brake housing. Obey
instructions for the installation in
(Ref. G. E. Maintenance Manual 72-10-00, P. Block 401).

D.

Preparation for Installation (Fig. 401)


N/A

E.

Installation (Fig. 401)


WARNING:

BE CAREFUL WHEN YOU USE MATERIAL Z-21.209. OBEY THE


MATERIAL MANUFACTURER'S INSTRUCTIONS.

(1) Coat bolts (7) with Mo-Lith No.2 Z-21.209 . Install brake head
assembly (1) over locating pin in gearbox. Secure brake head
assembly (1) to gearbox with two bolts (7) and washers (6).
Torque tighten bolts to 315-325 lb. in (35.6-36.7 Nm).
(2) Install hydraulic hoses (2) and (3) to brake head assembly (1).
Tighten hose connectors to standard torque value
(Ref.20-21-00, P. Block 1) .
(3) Install disk (13) between carrier and lining assemblies of brake
head assembly (1) and over brake disk drive (14).
WARNING:

BE CAREFUL WHEN YOU USE MATERIAL Z-21.209. OBEY THE


MATERIAL MANUFACTURER'S INSTRUCTIONS.

(4) Coat threads of bolts (11) with Mo-Lith No.2 Z-21.209 . Secure
disk (13) to brake disk drive (14) with bolts (11), washers (12)
and (15) and self locking nuts (16). Torque tighten nuts to
140-150 lb. in (15.8-16.9 Nm).
(5) Connect hose quick connector (9) to half quick connector (10).

Effectivity: See TOC

61-31-14

Pag. 405
Dec. 15/08

CN-235 MAINTENANCE MANUAL


F.

Test (Fig. 401)


(1) Remove safety clips and tags ITEM 20-15-01. Close the following
circuit breakers:
PANEL

SERVICE

FIN

BATTERY BUS 1

START

KA1

MISCELLANEOUS

HYDR PUMP 1
HYDR PUMP 2

QC1
QC2

R MISCELLANEOUS

PROP BRAKE

KE2

(2) Bleed brake system (Ref. 61-31-00, P. Block 301).


(3) With propeller brake deactivated, but with aircraft system back
pressure present, measure clearance between disk and lining,
using thickness gage, as shown in Fig. 401 . Minimum clearance
should be 0.060 in (1.54 mm).
(4) Do the adjustment/test procedure of propeller brake system
(Ref. 61-31-00, P. Block 501).
G.

Close-Up

** On A/C: Except CG01


(1) Install engine cowling 422AL , previously removed
(Ref. 71-10-11, P. Block 401).
** On A/C: Only for CG01
(2) Install engine cowling 422AL, previously removed
(Ref.71-11-11, P. Block 401).
** On A/C: All
(3) Remove access platform.
(4) Remove warning notices.
(5) Remove all tools and equipment from the work area. Make sure that
the work area is clean.

Effectivity: See TOC

61-31-14

Pag. 406
Dec. 15/08

CN-235 MAINTENANCE MANUAL


PROPELLER BRAKE HEAD ASSEMBLY
INSPECTION/CHECK
WARNING:

BEFORE STARTING MAINTENANCE WORK ON THE PROPELLER BRAKE SYSTEM PUT


NOTICES WARNING AGAINST STARTING OF THE ENGINE IN THE FLIGHT
COMPARTMENT

WARNING:

MAKE SURE THAT ELECTRICAL CIRCUITS INVOLVED ARE ISOLATED

CAUTION:

IF THE DISK REQUIRES REPLACEMENT, BOTH THE DISK AND THE LINKINGS
MUST BE REPLACED. THIS IS DUE TO UNIQUE WEAR PATTERNS THAT DEVELOP
ON MATING WEAR SURFACES

CAUTION:

BRAKE LININGS MUST NOT BE CLEANED WITH SOLVENTS. USE OF SOLVENTS


WILL CAUSE A BREAKDOWN IN BONDING MATERIAL.

1. Inspection of Brake Linings and disk


A.

Reason for the Job


Inspect propeller brake for wear.

B.

Equipment and Materials


ITEM

DESIGNATION

A.

ITEM 20-15-01

Circuit Breaker Safety Clips and Tags

B.

Standard Tool

Access Platform 3 m (10 ft)

C.

Standard Tool

Thickness Gage

D.

Standard Tool

Warning Notices

Referenced Procedures:
- 61-31-14, P. Block 401
- 71-10-11, P. Block 401

Effectivity: See TOC

- Propeller Brake Head Assembly


- Cowlings

61-31-14

Pag. 601
Dec. 15/08

CN-235 MAINTENANCE MANUAL


C.

Procedure
(1) Job Set-Up
(a) Open, safety ant tag ITEM 20-15-01 the following circuit
breakers:
PANEL

SERVICE

FIN

BATTERY BUS 1

START

KA1

MISCELLANEOUS

HYDR PUMP 1
HYDR PUMP 2

QC1
QC2

R MISCELLANEOUS

PROP BRAKE

KE2

(b) Put warning notices in flight compartment to prevent


starting of RH engine.
(c) Put access platform under RH engine.
(d) Remove engine cowling 422AL (Ref. 71-10-11, P. Block 401).
(2) If the brake linings (1) are contaminated, replace carrier and
lining assemblies (Ref. 61-31-14, P. Block 401). Do not attempt
to clean brake linings.
(3) If the disk (2) is dished or distorted, or if an uneven wear
pattern exists, replace disk and the carrier and lining
assemblies (Ref. 61-31-14, P. Block 401).
(4) Measure the thickness of disk. If measurement is less than 4.70
mm (0.185 in), replace disk and carrier and lining assemblies
(Ref. 61-31-14, P. Block 401).
(5) With brake de-energized but return pressure present, measure
thickness of both linings. If thickness is less than 2.54 mm (0.1
in), replace carrier and linings assemblies
(Ref. 61-31-14, P. Block 401).
(6) With brake de-energized but return pressure present, measure
clearance between disk and linings. Clearance must be 1.52-2.41
mm (0.060-0.095 in). If clearance is out of limits, reset brake
adjusters (Ref. G. E. Maintenance Manual 72-10-00, P. Block 401).

Effectivity: See TOC

61-31-14

Pag. 602
Dec. 15/08

CN-235 MAINTENANCE MANUAL


Propeller Brake Head Assembly

CM1.61.31.14.6AO.00.00-01

Fig. 601 Propeller Brake Head Assembly

Effectivity: See TOC

61-31-14

Pag. 603
Dec. 15/08

CN-235 MAINTENANCE MANUAL


D.

Close-Up
(1) Make sure that work area is clean and clear of tools and
miscellaneous equipment.
(2) Install engine cowling, 422AL, previously removed
(Ref. 71-10-11, P. Block 401).
(3) Remove access platform.
(4) Remove safety clip and tag ITEM 20-15-01 and close circuit
breaker KA1.
(5) Remove warning notices.

2. Non Destructive Inspection of the Propeller Brake Disk


A.

Reason for the Job


To do the 72.10.00.04 MRB task, "Non Destructive Inspection of the
Propeller Brake Disk by means of Penetrant Liquids or Magnaflux "

B.

Equipment and Materials


ITEM

DESIGNATION

A.

ITEM 20-15-01

Circuit Breaker Safety Clips and Tags

B.

Standard Tool

Access Platform 3 m (10 ft)

C.

Standard Tool

Warning Notices

Referenced Procedures:
- 61-31-14, P. Block 401
- SPM 70-32-01
- SPM 70-32-03
- EMM 72-10-00, P. Block 601
C.

- Propeller Brake Head Assembly


- Magnetic-Particle Method
- Spot-Fluorescent-Penetrant Inspection
- Propeller Gearbox

Procedure
(1) Job Set-Up
(a) Remove the Propeller Brake Disk
(Ref.61-31-14, P. Block 401)

Effectivity: See TOC

61-31-14

Pag. 604
Dec. 15/08

CN-235 MAINTENANCE MANUAL


(2) Inspection
(a) Send the Brake Disk to a Test Laboratory and do a Non
Destructive Inspection: Penetrant Liquid (Ref.SPM 70-32-03)
or Magnaflux (Ref.SPM 70-32-01)
NOTE:

Refer to (Ref.EMM 72-10-00, P. Block 601) for


acceptance limits

(3) Close Up
(a) Install the Propeller Brake Disk
(Ref.61-31-14, P. Block 401)

Effectivity: See TOC

61-31-14

Pag. 605
Dec. 15/08

CN-235 MAINTENANCE MANUAL

INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK

Effectivity: See TOC

61-31-14

Pag. 606
Dec. 15/08

CN-235 MAINTENANCE MANUAL


PROPELLER INDICATING
DESCRIPTION/OPERATION

1. General
Propeller indicating shows the operator when the propeller is or is not
operating in the beta mode.
2. Component Location (Fig. 1)
ITEM

FIN

1.

KC1
(KC2)

2
3.

DESIGNATION

ZONE

ACCESS
PANEL

REFERENCE

Circuit Breaker

211
(212)

24-50-03

KC19
(KC18)

Beta Light

211
(212)

24-00-10

KC17
(KC20)

Beta Light

211
(212)

24-00-10

3. Description
Propeller indicating is by beta lights KC19 (KC18) and KC17 (KC20).
Power is supplied thru circuit breaker KC1 (KC2).
4. Component Description
A.

Circuit Breaker KC1 (KC2)


The circuit breaker is rated at 3A and identified BETA.

B.

Beta Light KC19 (KC18) and KC17 (KC20)


The beta lights have four internal indicator lamps and are wired for
press-to-test. The panel color shows amber.

Effectivity: See TOC

61-40-00

CONFIG. 1
Pag. 1
Jul. 31/06

CN-235 MAINTENANCE MANUAL


Propeller Indicating - Component Location

CM1.61.40.00.0AO.00.01-00

Fig. 1 Propeller Indicating - Component Location

Effectivity: See TOC

61-40-00

CONFIG. 1
Pag. 2
Jul. 31/06

CN-235 MAINTENANCE MANUAL


5. Operation (Fig. 2)
When a propeller is operating in the beta mode the lamps of the beta
lights come on. Pushing the beta light also causes the lamps of the beta
lights to come on thus testing the integrity of the circuit.
6. Interfaces (Fig. 2)
Propeller indicating interfaces with propeller controlling.
Power supplies are from electrical load distribution.
When the propeller is in beta mode a signal is sent to the flight data
recording system.

Effectivity: See TOC

61-40-00

CONFIG. 1
Pag. 3
Jul. 31/06

CN-235 MAINTENANCE MANUAL


Propeller Indicating - Operation and Interface

CM1.61.40.00.0BO.00.01-00

Fig. 2 Propeller Indicating - Operation and Interface

Effectivity: Series 10

61-40-00

CONFIG. 1
Pag. 4
Jul. 31/06

CN-235 MAINTENANCE MANUAL

CM1.61.40.00.0BA.00.01-00

Propeller Indicating - Operation and Interface


Fig. 2A Propeller Indicating - Operation and Interface

Effectivity: See TOC

61-40-00

CONFIG. 1
Pag. 5
Jul. 31/06

CN-235 MAINTENANCE MANUAL

INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK

Effectivity: See TOC

61-40-00

CONFIG. 1
Pag. 6
Jul. 31/06

CN-235 MAINTENANCE MANUAL


PROPELLER INDICATING
TROUBLESHOOTING

1. General
This section contains troubleshooting procedures for the propeller
indicating system.
2. Troubleshooting Guide
A.
WITH ENGINE RUNNING IN THE BETA
RANGE, INDICATOR LIGHT DOES NOT
COME ON. RELEVANT CIRCUIT
BREAKER KC1, KC2 CLOSED.

OBSERVE ASSOCIATED
LIGHT AT PILOT OR
COPILOT POSITION.
IS THAT LIGHT ON?

SUPPORT EQUIPMENT REQUIRED


-MULTIMETER

PUSH TO TEST
INDICATOR.
YES

DO INDICATORS FAIL
TEST?

NO

NO

BETA SWITCH KC39


(KC40) IN CONTROL
AND ADAPTER UNIT
SUSPECT. REPLACE
CONTROL AND
ADAPTER
(Ref. 61-20-16, P.
Block 401).

INSPECT WIRING AND


REPLACE OR REPAIR
AS NECESSARY.

Effectivity: See TOC

REPLACE APPLICABLE
BETA LIGHT.
YES

YES

61-40-00

Pag. 101
Jul. 31/93

CN-235 MAINTENANCE MANUAL

INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK

Effectivity: See TOC

61-40-00

Pag. 102
Jul. 31/93

CN-235 MAINTENANCE MANUAL


PROPELLER INDICATING
INSPECTION/CHECK

1. Beta Mode Indicating System Circuit Check


A.

Reason for the Job


(1) To make certain that integrity of wiring circuits from pressure
switch to flight compartment is correct.

B.

Equipment and Materials


ITEM

DESIGNATION

(1)

Access Platform, 2 m (6.5 ft)

(2)

Warning Notice

(3)

ITEM 20-15-01

Circuit Breaker Safety Clips and Tags

(4)

Jumper Connection

(5)

ITEM 20-00-01

Multimeter

Referenced Procedures:
- 06-41-54, P. Block 1
- 24-40-00, P. Block 501
C.

- Access Provisions - Nacelle


- External Power

Procedure
(1) Job Set-Up
(a) Put notice in flight compartment warning against starting or
ground running of relevant engine.
(b) Open, safety and tag the following circuit breakers:
PANEL

SERVICE

FIN

BATTERY BUS 1

BETA

KC1

BATTERY BUS 2

BETA

KC2

(c) Put access platform under relevant propeller.


(d) Open relevant side cowling (Ref. 06-41-54, P. Block 1).
Effectivity: See TOC

61-40-00

Pag. 601
Mar. 31/00

CN-235 MAINTENANCE MANUAL


(e) Connect ground power unit (GPU) and switch on aircraft
electrical system (Ref. 24-40-00, P. Block 501).
(2) Circuit Check (Fig. 601)
(a) Disconnect connector (3) at relevant pressure switch
receptacle (4). Install protective plug and cap to connector
and receptacle.
(b) Remove safety clip and tag and close relevant BETA circuit
breaker (6), (7).
(c) Press-to-test pilot and copilot BETA light indicators (1) or
(2). Make certain that relevant lights come on when pressed.
(d) Open, safety and tag BETA circuit breaker closed in step
(b).
(e) Remove protective cap from relevant receptacle. Make certain
that receptacle is clean and undamaged, and that pins are
intact and moisture free.
(f) Using multimeter, do test for infinity between pressure
switch and case.
(g) Install protective cap to receptacle.
(h) Remove protective plug from connector. Install bonding
jumper across pins A and B of connector.
(j) Remove safety clip and tag and close relevant BETA circuit
breaker (6), (7). Make certain that relevant BETA lights (1)
or (2) come on at pilot and copilot positions.
(k) Open, safety and tag relevant BETA circuit breakers (6),
(7). Remove bonding jumper from connector (3).
(l) Remove protective cap from receptacle and connect connector
(3), to receptacle (4).
(m) Repeat steps (a) thru (l) on opposite propeller as
necessary.

Effectivity: See TOC

61-40-00

Pag. 602
Mar. 31/00

CN-235 MAINTENANCE MANUAL


Propeller Indicating

CM1.61.40.00.6AO.00.00-00

Fig. 601 Propeller Indicating

Effectivity: See TOC

61-40-00

Pag. 603
Mar. 31/00

CN-235 MAINTENANCE MANUAL


(3) Close-Up
(a) Make certain that working area is clean and clear of tools
and miscellaneous items.
(b) Close and secure side cowlings previously removed
(Ref. 06-41-54, P. Block 1).
(c) Remove access platform.
(d) Remove safety clip and tag and close BETA circuit breakers
KC1, KC2.
(e) Remove warning notices.
(f) Switch off aircraft electrical system and disconnect GPU
(Ref. 24-40-00, P. Block 501).

Effectivity: See TOC

61-40-00

Pag. 604
Mar. 31/00

S-ar putea să vă placă și